X1 E84 Owners Manual

Contents
Owner's Handbook
for Vehicle
The Ultimate
A-Z
Driving Machine
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

X1 sDrive18i Owner's Handbook for Vehicle
X1 xDrive25i Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.
X1 xDrive 28i The better you are acquainted with your vehicle, the easier you
will find driving it to be. We would therefore like to offer you the
following advice:
X1 sDrive18d
X1 xDrive18d Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your
new BMW. You will receive important notes on how to operate
X1 sDrive 20d the vehicle, enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the
X1 xDrive 20d technical advantages of your BMW. You will also receive useful
X1 xDrive 23d information that will help you to uphold both the vehicle's operat-
ing safety and its full resale value.
Supplementary information is provided in the other documents
of on-board literature.
We wish you a safe and enjoyable journey,
BMW Group

© 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without
written permission from BMW AG, Munich.
English II/10, 03 10 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
Overview
The quickest access to a particular topic or item Communication
is by consulting the detailed alphabetical index, 166 Telephone
see page 242. 178 Contacts
181 BMW Services
About this Owner's Handbook
Controls
4 Notes Mobility
190 Refuelling
Overview
192 Fuel
10 Cockpit
193 Wheels and tyres
16 iDrive
Driving hints
197 Engine compartment
21 Voice control system
202 Routine maintenance work
Controls 204 General care
26 Opening and closing 207 Replacing parts
37 Adjusting 216 Breakdown assistance
45 Child safety
Reference
50 Driving
Navigation
224 Technical data
61 Everything under control
229 For Australia/New Zealand
73 Technical features for driving comfort and
232 Short commands for the voice control
safety
system
86 Lights
238 Maintenance overview
91 Climate
Entertainment
242 From A to Z
95 Interior equipment
Driving hints
108 Driving precautions
Navigation
118 Navigation system
119 Destination input Communication
129 Route guidance
135 What to do if ...
Entertainment
138 On/off and settings
141 Radio
145 Digital radio DAB
Mobility
148 CD/DVD player and CD changer

155 Music collection
160 External devices
Reference

Notes
Notes
About this Owner's Symbols used

Handbook Indicates precautions that must be fol-
We have tried to make all the information in this lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
Owner's Handbook easy to find. The quickest sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
access to a specific topic or item is by consult- the vehicle.<
ing the detailed alphabetical index at the end. Indicates information that will assist you
Consult the first chapter for an initial overview of in gaining the optimum benefit from your
your vehicle. vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
When the time comes to sell your BMW, please for your vehicle.<
remember to hand over this Owner's Hand- Refers to measures that can be taken to
book; it is an important part of the vehicle. help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
Additional sources of information tion.
Your Service will be happy to advise you if you * Identifies optional extras or specific national-
have any further questions. market items of equipment, as well as equip-
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects, ment and functions not yet available at the time
can also be found on the Internet on of printing.
www.bmw.com. "..." Identifies texts on the control display for
selecting functions..
{...} Identifies commands for the voice control
system.
{{...}} Identifies replies by the voice control sys-
tem.
Symbol for components and

assemblies
Recommends that you study the relevant
section of this Owner's Handbook in con-
nection with a particular part or assembly.
4
Your individual vehicle ongoing development. Because modifications
Overview
in the design of both vehicles and accessories
When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari- may be introduced at any time, your own vehi-
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Hand- cle's equipment may vary from that described in
book describes all models and equipment this manual. For the same reason, it is also
specifications which BMW offers within this impossible to guarantee that all descriptions
particular model line. will be completely accurate in all respects. We
This explains why the Owner's Handbook may must therefore request your understanding of
Controls
also contain details of items which you have not the fact that we are unable to recognise legal
ordered. The differences can easily be identi- claims based on discrepancies between the
fied by the asterisk * shown against optional data, illustrations and descriptions in this man-
extras. ual and your own vehicle's equipment. Please
Should your BMW feature equipment which is note, too, that some of the optional equipment
Driving hints
not described in this Owner's Handbook, described in this manual is not available on Aus-
please refer to the Supplementary Owner's tralian models due to restrictions imposed by
Handbooks supplied with your vehicle. Australian Design Rules and other require-
ments.
In right-hand drive vehicles, some of the
controls are arranged differently from If you have any queries, your Authorised BMW
those shown in the illustrations of this Owner's Dealer will be glad to advise you.
Handbook.<
Navigation
For your own safety
Built-date* Your vehicle is configured for the operating
Your BMW has a 'built-date information' at the conditions and registration requirements of
partition wall in the engine compartment. your country. If the vehicle is to be operated in
Entertainment
another country, your vehicle must be adapted
The 'built-date' is defined as 'the calendar
to any prevailing different operating conditions
month and the calendar year in which the body
and permit requirements.
shell and the powertrain subassemblies are
Information on possible exclusion of warranty or
conjoined and the vehicle is driven or moved
warranty restrictions for your vehicle can be
from the production line'.
obtained from your Service Centre.
Routine maintenance work and repairs Communication

Status at time of printing The advanced technology behind this
The high safety and quality standards of BMW vehicle, for example the use of modern
vehicles are maintained by unceasing develop- materials and high-performance electronics,
ment work on designs, equipment and acces- means that specially adapted methods of main-
sories. In rare instances, your vehicle may tenance and repair are required. Always have
therefore differ from the information supplied in the necessary work on your BMW performed
the Owner's Handbook. either by BMW Service or by a workshop that
operates to BMW specifications and has suita-
Mobility
For customers in Australia/New bly trained personnel. If such work is performed

Zealand inexpertly, it could result in consequential dam-
As you read this manual, please bear the follow- age and thus constitute a safety risk.<
ing in mind: to ensure that our vehicles continue
to embody the highest quality and safety stand-
Reference
ards, we at BMW pursue a policy of continuous,
5
Parts and accessories
Notes
BMW recommends using parts and

accessory products on this vehicle that
are specifically approved for this purpose by
BMW.
You are recommended to consult BMW Service
for advice on Genuine BMW parts and accesso-
ries, other BMW-approved products and com-
petent advice on all related matters.
The safety and compatibility of these parts and
products in conjunction with BMW vehicles
have been checked by BMW. BMW accepts
product liability for them.
BMW cannot accept liability for parts or acces-
sory products of any kind which it has not
approved.
BMW is unable to assess each individual prod-
uct of outside origin as to its suitability for use
on BMW vehicles without safety risk. This suit-
ability cannot be guaranteed even if an official
permit has been issued for the particular prod-
uct in a specific country. Tests performed for
such permits cannot always cover all operating
conditions for BMW vehicles, and some of them
therefore are insufficient.<
6
7
Reference Mobility Communication Entertainment Navigation Driving hints Controls Overview
Overview
This summary of buttons, switches and
displays serves as an initial guide.
In addition, it gives you an insight
into the principles behind the various ways
in which functions can be performed.

Cockpit
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Safety switch for electric rear windows 35 5 Steering-lever stop, left

2 Window lifts 34
Flashing turn indicators 56
3 Operating the outside mirrors 42
4 Lights High-beam headlights/headlight
flasher 88
Headlight beam throw
adjustment* 88 High-Beam Assistant* 88
Side lights 86 Parking lights* 88
Low-beam headlights 86 Computer 63

Automatic driving lights Settings and information about the
control* 86 vehicle 65
Adaptive Head Light* 87
High-Beam Assistant* 88 Instrument lighting 90
Fog lights 89
Rear fog lights 89
10
6 Buttons on the steering wheel, left 15 Lever for speed control
Overview
Telephone*: Cruise control* 59
Receiving and ending a call; start-
ing dialling* for a selected phone 16 Open tailgate* 30
number; redialling if no phone
17 Releasing the engine compartment lid 197
number is selected
Controls
Volume control
Activating/deactivating voice con-
Driving hints
trol system* 21
7 Shift paddles* 55
8 Instrument cluster 12
9 Buttons on the steering wheel, right
Change radio station interrupt traf-
fic reports select audio track
Navigation
Change TV programme
Browsing the redial list
Next entertainment source
Entertainment
Recirculated-air mode 92
10 Switching the ignition on/off and

starting/stopping the engine 50
11 Steering-lever stop, right Communication

Windscreen wipers 56
Rain sensor* 57
Rear window wiper 58

Mobility
12 Ignition lock 50
13 Horn, entire surface
14 Adjusting steering wheel 43
Reference
11
Instrument cluster
Cockpit
1 Speedometer 6 Display for

2 Indicator and warning lights 13 > Position of automatic gearbox* 54
3 Revolution counter 61 > Hill Descent Control* 79
4 Engine oil temperature* 62 > Computer 63
Energy Control* 62 > Date of next scheduled service, and
5 Display for remaining driving distance 66
> Clock 61 > Distance recorder – odometer – and trip
> Outside temperature 61 distance recorder 61
> Indicator and warning lights 69 > High-Beam Assistant* 88
> Display for speed control* 59 > Checking engine oil level* 198
> Settings and information 65
> There is a Check Control
message 69
> Gearshift point display* 64
7 Fuel gauge 62
8 Resetting trip distance recorder 61
12
Indicator and warning lights In urgent cases, this information will be shown
Overview
as soon as the corresponding light comes on.
The principle
Indicator lights without text messages
The following indicator lights indicate that spe-
cific functions are active:
High-beam headlights/
Controls
headlight flasher 88
Fog lights 89
Rear fog lights* 89
Driving hints
Indicator and warning lights can light up in a
variety of combinations and colours. DSC or DTC 79
Some lights are checked for proper functioning
and thus come on briefly when the engine starts Dynamic Traction Control DTC 78
or the ignition is switched on.
Handbrake applied 53
Explanatory text messages
Engine malfunction with degradation
Navigation
of the emissions 203
Flashing turn indicators 56
Run Flat Indicator RPA 80
Entertainment
Text messages at the top of the Control Display
explain the meaning of the indicator and warn-
ing lights being shown.
Communication
Mobility
You can call up additional information, e.g.

about the possible cause of a fault and about
what corresponding measures should be taken,
via Check Control, see page 69.
Reference
13
Around the centre console: controls and displays
Cockpit
1 Roof lining 15 10 Controller with buttons 16

2 Control Display 16
3 Air outlets 93
4
Hazard warning flashers 216
Central locking system 30
5 Automatic air conditioning system 91

6 Glove box 98
7 Radio and CD/DVD drive* 138
8 Park Distance Control PDC* 73

Rear-view camera* 75
Hill Descent Control HDC* 79
Deactivating the automatic start/

stop function* 52
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 39
9 Gearshift lever for manual transmission 54

Selector lever for automatic
transmission 54
14
Comprehensive information on the roof lining
Overview
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
1 SOS: initiating an emergency
call* 216
2 Panorama glass roof* 35
Entertainment
3 Indicator light* front passenger
airbags 85
4 Reading lights 90
5 Interior lights 90
Communication
Mobility
Reference
15
iDrive
iDrive
The principle Switching off

1. Press the OPTION button.
iDrive integrates the functions of a large
number of switches. These functions thus can 2. "Switch off control display"
be controlled from one central point.
Only make adjustments if the traffic con-
ditions are sufficiently quiet or clear, so as
not to endanger the vehicle's occupants and
other road users by being distracted.<
Overview of controls
Controls
Switching on
Press the controller to switch on.
Controller
Select menu items and adjust settings.
1. Turn.
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
The buttons can be used to call up menus
directly. The controller is used to select
menu items and adjust settings.
Control Display 2. Press

> Information. Please observe information on
cleaning the Control Displays, see
page 206.
> Do not place items in front of the Control
Display to avoid damage to the Control Dis-
play.
16
3. Jog in four directions 1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
Overview
item is highlighted.
Controls
Buttons on the controller
2. Press controller.
Driving hints
Button Function
A new menu is displayed or the function is exe-
MENU Calls up the main menu cuted.
RADIO Calls up the 'Radio' menu
Menu items in the Owner's Handbook
CD Calls up the CD/Multimedia
menu In the Owner's Manual the menu items to be
selected are displayed in inverted commas, e.g.
NAV Calls up the 'Navigation' menu
"Settings".
Navigation
TEL Calls up the 'Telephone' menu
BACK Displays the previous menu Switching between screens
OPTION Calls up the 'Options' menu After selecting a menu items, e.g. "Radio", a
new menu is displayed on a board. These
screens can lie one on top of the other.
Entertainment
Operating principle Jog the controller to the left or right to switch
between the screens.
Calling up the main menu
Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
Communication
White arrows to the left or right indicate that

other screens can be called up.
All the functions of iDrive can be called up via

Mobility
the main menu.
Selecting a menu item

Menu items in white can be selected by high-
lighting them.
Reference
17
Calling up the 'Options' menu An example: setting the clock
iDrive
Press the OPTION button. 1. Press the MENU button.

The "Options" menu is displayed. The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high-
lighted and press the controller.
Other possibility: jog the controller to the right

until the "Options" menu is displayed.
The following is shown in the "Options" menu: 3. Turn the controller until "Clock/Date" is
> Screen settings, see page 16. highlighted and press the controller.
> Operating options for the selected menu.
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-

3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.

The scrollbar on the right-hand side indi-
cates whether other menu items or set-
tings that are not visible at the moment can be
selected.<
5. Turn the controller to set the hour and press
the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the minute and
press the controller.
18
Status information Switching split screen on and off*
Overview
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Split screen"
The split screen view is switched on.
Select display for split screen content*

With the split screen switched on, you can
Controls
select the displayed content.
1. Jog the controller repeatedly to the right
until the split screen content is selected.
1 Time 2. Select the display.
Driving hints
2 Display for:
> Reception level of mobile telephone
network, depending on mobile phone
> Incoming and outgoing, missed call
> Receiving an SMS*
3 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Navigation
Radio, CD/DVD, external devices, TV*
> Telephone*:
Name of the mobile phone logged in to
the vehicle Favourites buttons
Certain iDrive functions can be memorised on
Entertainment
4 Sound output switched off or
display for traffic announcements*: the favourites buttons and called up directly,
> "TP": e.g. radio stations, navigation destinations, tel-
Traffic Programme is on. ephone numbers and jumps into the menu.
> No display:
Storing a function
Traffic Programme is switched off.
1. Highlight the function via iDrive.
Communication
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during 2. ... Press the desired button for
Check Control message displays or inputs via longer than 2 seconds.
the voice control system*.
Example of favourites buttons
Professional navigation system: split Switching voice instructions for navigation on/
screen off.
In the split screen view, additional information 1. "Navigation"
can be displayed in the right-hand section, e.g. 2. "Map"
Mobility
information from the on-board computer.

3. Use the controller to select the symbol.
This information remains visible in the split
4. ... Press the desired button for
screen view even if a switch is made to another
longer than 2 seconds.
menu.
Running a function
Reference
... Press the button.
19
The function is run immediately. This means Switching between letters and digits
iDrive
that e.g. on selection of a telephone number the Depending on the menu, you can switch
connection is also established. between the input of letters and digits:
Displaying the assignment of the Symbol Function

buttons To enter letters
Touch the buttons with your finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects. To enter digits
Displaying brief info Input matching for navigation

... Touch the button. Input of names and addresses: the selection is
The assignment of the buttons is displayed at gradually narrowed down and possibly supple-
the top edge of the screen. mented with every subsequent letter that you
enter.
Destination search: inputs are continuously
compared with the data stored in the vehicle.
> Only letters for addresses that have data are
offered during input.
> Town/city names can be entered in the syn-
tax of all the languages available on the
Control Display.
Displaying detailed information

... Touch the button for longer.
Letters and digits

Entering letters and digits
1. Turn the controller: selects letters or digits.
2. If applicable, select other letters or digits.
3. "OK": confirm the input.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: deletes

a letter or digit
Press and hold down the
controller: deletes all num-
bers or letters
Enters a space
20
Voice control system*
Overview
The principle control system is ready to receive spoken
commands.
The voice control system enables you to oper-
ate various items of equipment on your vehicle
without having to take your hands off the steer-
Controls
ing wheel.
Most of the menu items on the Control Display
can be called up as voice commands. It is not
necessary to use the controller.
Driving hints
The voice control system translates your com-
mands into control signals for the system in
question, and assists you by means of
announcements or questions. 2. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis-
The voice control system includes a special
play.
microphone positioned near the interior mirror,
see page 14. This symbol appears on the Control Display if
further commands can be given.
Navigation
Condition If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Via iDrive, select the language in which the
voice control system is operating, so that the
Ending or interrupting voice control
spoken commands can be identified. Selecting
the language for iDrive, see page 72. Press the button on the steering wheel
Entertainment
or
Symbols in the Owner's Handbook {Cancel}
{...} Enunciate commands shown in this In dialogues where any text can be spoken, can-
form precisely as given. celling is only possible using the button on the
{{...}} Identifies the replies by the voice steering wheel.
control system.
Possible commands Communication
The commands that are possible in each case
Speaking commands depend on the selected menu item on the Con-
trol Display.
Activating voice control To have possible commands read aloud:
1. Press the button on the steering wheel. {Voice commands} or {Help}
This symbol on the Control Display and For instance, if you have selected "CD", the
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice available commands for operating the CD/Mul-
Mobility
timedia will be read out.

Reference
21
Calling up functions immediately using > Do not use the voice control system for
Voice control system
short commands emergency calls. In stress situations, the

Short commands enable you to perform certain spoken language and voice pitch can
functions immediately irrespective of which change. This delays establishment of a tel-
menu item is selected, see page 232. ephone connection unnecessarily.
> Say the commands and numbers fluently
An example: selecting a track from a CD and at normal volume; avoid unnatural
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio emphases and pauses. This also applies to
output. spelling out and saying an entire word for
destination input.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
3. Select a music track, e.g.:
standard pronunciation of the station name.
{CD track 4}
The system says: > When making entries in the voice-activated
{{Track 4}} phone book, use only names in the lan-
guage of the voice control system, and do
not use abbreviations.
Setting the speech dialogue > Keep doors, windows and panorama glass
You can set whether the system uses the roof* closed to avoid noise interference
standard dialogue or the short variant. With the from outside the vehicle.
short variant of the voice dialogue, the com-
> Avoid causing background noise in the
mands and responses of the system are short-
vehicle while you are speaking.
ened.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select a setting:
> "Standard"
> "Short"
Notes
More information about voice control of
the telephone appears on page 174.<
When using the voice control, note the follow-
ing:
22
23
Controls
This chapter enables you to operate your
vehicle with greater ease. All equipment items
that are of relevance for driving and make your
journey safer and more comfortable are
described here.

Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Remote control/key In addition, information about service require-

ments is stored in the remote control, see
Scope of delivery Service data in the remote control, page 202.
Integrated key
Two remote controls with key.
Buttons on the remote control Press button 1 to release the key.

The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Keyswitch for front passenger airbags*,
see page 85
> Driver's door, see page 29
New remote controls

Additional remote controls with integrated key
or replacements in case of loss are available
from your Service.
1 Releasing
2 Locking
3 Open the tailgate
Personal Profile
The principle
General
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
Every remote control contains a rechargeable
suit your personal needs and preferences.
battery that is automatically recharged when it
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro-
is in the ignition lock while the vehicle is being
file ensures that most of these settings are
driven. Drive a longer distance with each
saved for the remote control currently in use.
remote control at least twice annually in order to
When you unlock the vehicle the remote control
maintain battery charge. If your vehicle is fitted
used for the purpose is recognised and the set-
with convenient access*, the remote control
tings saved for it are called up and imple-
contains a replaceable battery, see page 34.
mented.
The settings called up and implemented when
This means that your personal settings will be
the vehicle is unlocked depend on which
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
remote control is used to unlock the vehicle,
BMW was used by someone else with another
see Personal Profile, next column.
remote control and the corresponding settings.
26
The individual settings are memorised for a > Entertainment:
Overview
maximum of four remote controls; in the case of > Tone settings, see page 138
convenient access*, for two.
> Speed-dependent volume control, see
page 139
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, see
the pages referred to.
Central locking system
Controls
> Assignment of the favourites buttons, see
page 19 The principle
> Response of the central locking system The central locking system functions when the
when the vehicle is unlocked, see page 28 driver's door is closed.
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, see The following are unlocked or locked in combi-
Driving hints
page 30 nation:
> Automatically calling up* the driver's seat > Doors
position, see page 40
> Tailgate
> Triple turn signal, see page 56
> Fuel filler flap
> Settings for display on the Control Display
and in the instrument cluster: Operating from outside
> 12-hour/24-hour format of the clock,
Navigation
> Via the remote control
see page 69
> Via the door lock*
> Date format, see page 69
> With convenient access* by means of the
> Brightness, see page 72 handles on the driver's and the front pas-
> Language, see page 72 senger's door
Entertainment
> Units of measure, see page 65 Locking/unlocking simultaneously using the
remote control:
> Park Distance Control PDC*: visual warn-
ing, see page 74 > Deadlock* is also activated/deactivated.
Doors cannot be opened with the safety
> Rear-view camera*:
lock buttons or the door handles.
> Select functions, see page 75
> Welcome lights, interior lights and ground
Communication
> Type of display, see page 77 lights* are activated/deactivated.
> Light settings: > Alarm system*, see page 31, is engaged
> Welcome lights, see page 86 disengaged.
> Headlight courtesy delay feature, see
page 87 Operating from inside
> Daytime driving lights, see page 87 By means of the button for central locking, see
page 30.
> High-Beam Assistant, see page 88
If the vehicle was locked from inside, the fuel
> Automatic air conditioning system: activat-
filler flap remains unlocked*.
Mobility
ing/deactivating AUTO program, cooling

function and Automatic Air Recirculation In the event of a severe accident the central
Control, setting temperature, air flow rate locking unlocks automatically.
and distribution, see page 91 onwards Hazard warning lights and interior light are
switched on.
Reference
27
Opening and closing: from Locking
Opening and closing
the outside Press the button.

Do not lock the vehicle from the outside
With the remote control when there is someone inside it, as it can-
not then be unlocked from the inside in some
General national-market versions and with certain spe-
Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets cial equipment.<
left inside can lock the doors from the
inside. You should therefore take the remote Convenient closing
control with you when you get out of the vehicle Hold the button pressed.
so that the latter can be opened from the out- Windows and the panorama glass roof* are
side.< closed.
Watch the closing movement to ensure
Unlocking that no one is trapped. The closing proce-
Press the button. dure is interrupted if the button is released.<
Vehicle is unlocked.
You can select how to open your vehicle.
Switch on interior light, ground lights*
and welcoming lights
1. "Settings"
While the vehicle is locked:
2. "Door locks" Press the button.
3. "Unlock button" This function also enables you to locate the
vehicle, for instance in a parking garage.
Unlocking the tailgate

Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate opens a short distance, regardless
of whether it was locked or unlocked.
On certain national-market versions, the
tailgate cannot be opened unless the
vehicle has been unlocked.
4. Select a menu item: The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
when opened. Make sure that there is sufficient
> "All doors"
clearance. To prevent being locked out inad-
Press the button once to unlock the
vertently, do not place the remote control in the
entire vehicle.
luggage area. If the tailgate had been locked
> "Driver's door only" before it was opened, it is locked again as soon
Press the button once to unlock the as it is closed.
driver's door and the fuel filler flap. Before and after each trip, check that the tail-
Press it twice to unlock the entire vehi- gate has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
cle.
5. Press controller. Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
Convenient opening signals.
Hold the button pressed. 1. "Settings"
Windows and the panorama glass roof* are
2. "Door locks"
opened.
28
3. "Visual signal lock/unlock" national-market versions and with certain spe-
Overview
cial equipment.<
In some national-market versions the alarm*
system is triggered, see page 31, if the vehicle
is unlocked using the door lock.
Unlock the vehicle with the remote control or
insert the remote control into the ignition lock
Controls
up to the stop to deactivate the triggered alarm.
If the vehicle is not fitted with an alarm
system* or convenient access*, only the
4. Press controller. driver's door can be locked at the door lock.<
Flashing on locking/unlocking is switched To lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and the
Driving hints
on. tailgate together:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle by
Malfunctions means of the central locking button in the
The remote control may malfunction as a result passenger compartment, see page 30.
of interference from local radio signals. If this 2. Unlock and open the driver's or the front
occurs, unlock and lock the vehicle at the door passenger's door, see page 30.
lock with the integrated key. 3. Lock the vehicle.
Navigation
If the vehicle does not have an alarm system* or > Lock the driver's door at the door lock,
convenient access*, only the driver's door can using the integrated key, or
be unlocked and locked at the door lock by
> Press down the safety lock button of the
means of the integrated key.
front passenger's door and close the
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with a door from outside.
Entertainment
remote control, the battery in the remote con-
trol is flat. Use this remote control for a longer Convenient operation
trip so that the battery is recharged, see
The alarm system* or convenient access*
page 26. The remote control for convenient
allow you to operate the windows and the pan-
access* contains a battery that might have to
orama glass roof* with the door lock.
be replaced, see page 34.
Communication
Opening/closing
Via the door lock
Hold the key in the unlocking/locking position
General when the door is closed.
Monitor the closing procedure and make
sure no one is trapped.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical defect, use the inte-
grated key to unlock or lock the driver's door
Mobility
lock.
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside

when there is someone inside it, as it can-
Reference
not then be unlocked from the inside in some
29
Opening and closing: from Unlocking and opening
Opening and closing
the inside > Either unlock the doors together using the
central locking button and then pull the
door handle above the armrest or
> Pull the door handle out twice at any door:
the first pull unlocks the door, the second
one opens it.
Locking
> Either lock all doors at once via the central
locking button, or
> Press down the safety lock button of a door.
Unlocking and locking To prevent that you are shut out of the vehi-
Press button inside the vehicle. cle accidentally, the driver's door cannot be
locked with the safety lock button when it is
open.
Doors and tailgate are locked/unlocked if the
Persons remaining in the vehicle or pets
front doors are closed. However, the deadlock
left inside can lock the doors from the
is not activated. The fuel filler flap remains
inside. You should therefore take the remote
unlocked*.
control with you when you get out of the vehicle
so that the latter can be opened from the out-
Automatic locking side.<
You can set how to lock the vehicle:
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks" Tailgate
3. Select the desired function:
Opening
> "Automatic relock"
The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards
Central locking is activated after a short
when opened.
period of time if no door was opened.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.
> "Lock after drive away"
Central locking is activated as soon as
you drive off.
Opening from inside*
Press the button. The tailgate is

The function is switched on and is stored opened when the vehicle is stationary
for the remote control currently in use. if it has not been secured.
30
Opening from outside Closing
Overview
Controls
Press the button, see arrow, or press the The recessed handles in the interior trim of the
button on the remote control for a longer tailgate make it easier to pull the tailgate down.
Driving hints
period of time. The tailgate will open slightly. It Before closing the tailgate, make sure that the
can now be swung upwards. floor panel in the luggage compartment is not
On certain national-market versions, the tilted upwards, see page 104.
luggage compartment lid/tailgate cannot To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing
be opened with the remote control unless the area of the tailgate is unobstructed.<
vehicle has been unlocked.<
Opening manually Alarm system*
Navigation
In the event of an electrical fault:
1. Fold down the rear seat back rest, see The principle
Enlarge luggage compartment on The alarm system reacts if:
page 101.
> Opening a door, the engine compartment or
Entertainment
2. From the luggage compartment, press out the tailgate.
the handle in the tailgate, see arrow, and
> There is any movement inside the vehicle:
pull out to the stop. The tailgate is unlocked.
Interior movement detector, see page 32.
> Changing the inclination of the vehicle, e.g.
when attempting to steal wheels or to tow
away.
> Interrupting the battery voltage. Communication
The alarm system will respond briefly to unau-
thorised attempts to access the car as follows:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning lights
3. Open the tailgate from the outside and
press the handle in again. Arming and disarming
The tailgate is closed again as soon as it is Whenever the vehicle is locked or unlocked,
Mobility
closed. either with the remote control or at the door

lock, the alarm system is armed or disarmed at
the same time.
Reference
31
Door lock when alarm system is armed > Indicator light flashes after unlocking (for a
Opening and closing
On certain national-market versions, unlocking maximum of approx. 5 minutes) until the

via the door lock triggers off the alarm. remote control has been inserted into the
ignition lock:
This type of alarm system can only be disarmed
Alarm was triggered.
using the remote control.
Panic mode*
Tailgate when alarm system is armed
Trigger the alarm when in danger:
The tailgate can be opened with the remote
control also when the alarm system is armed. Press the remote control for at least
three seconds.
Press the button on the remote con-
trol. To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Closing the tailgate locks it and arms the alarm.

Tilt alarm sensor
The hazard warning lights flash once.
Inclination of the vehicle is monitored.
On certain national-market versions, the lug-
gage compartment lid/tailgate cannot be Alarm system reacts, e.g. in an attempt to steel
opened with the remote control unless the vehi- wheels or to tow away.
cle has been unlocked.
Interior movement detector
Switching off an alarm Windows and panorama glass roof* must be
> Unlock the vehicle with the remote control, closed for correct operation.
see page 28.
Avoiding false alarms
> Insert the remote control fully into the igni-
tion lock. Tilt alarm sensor and interior protection can be
deactivated jointly, e.g. in the following situa-
Indicator light on the interior mirror tions:
> In duplex garages
> When being transported on vehicle-carry-
ing trains, boats/ships or trailers
> When animals are in the vehicle
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior movement detector
Press the button on the remote control
twice in succession.
> Indicator light flashes every 2 seconds: Indicator light lights up for approx. 2 seconds
The system is armed. and subsequently continues to flash.
> Indicator light flashes after locking: The tilt alarm sensor and interior movement
Doors, engine compartment or tailgate are detector are switched off until the car is next
not closed correctly, the rest is locked. locked.
Afterwards indicator light flashes after
approx. 10 seconds. Interior movement
sensor is not activated.
> Indicator light goes off after unlocking:
The vehicle was not tampered with.
32
Convenient access* Locking
Overview
The principle
Access to the vehicle without operating the
remote control.
It is enough to carry the remote control, e.g. in
the jacket pocket.
Controls
The vehicle automatically detects the remote
control near or on the inside of the vehicle.
Convenient access supports the following
Touch the area in the door handle, arrow 2, with
functions:
the finger for approx. 1 second.
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
Driving hints
Corresponds to pressing button.
> Unlocking the tailgate individually
To preserve the vehicle battery, make sure that
> Starting the engine the ignition and all consumers are switched off
> Convenient closing before locking.
If a remote control is detected on the inside, you
Operating requirements cannot lock or unlock.
> The remote control must be outside of the
Navigation
vehicle to lock it. Convenient closing
> Locking/unlocking is only possible after Press and hold down the area, arrow 2, with the
approx. 2 seconds. finger.
> It is only possible to start the engine if the Windows and the panorama glass roof* are also
remote control is in the vehicle. closed.
Entertainment
Comparison with ordinary remote Unlocking the tailgate individually
control Press the button on the outside of the tailgate,
The listed functions can be operated by using see page 31.
the remote control or convenient access. Corresponds to pressing button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote control has
Communication
Releasing
been left inside the vehicle or in the luggage
compartment, the tailgate opens again.
Ignition on
The ignition is switched on by pressing the
Start/stop button.
Do not depress the brake or clutch, otherwise
the engine will start.
Mobility
Starting the engine

Put your hand right round the handle of the
The engine may be started or the ignition
driver's or the front passenger's door, arrow 1.
turned on if a remote control is on the inside of
Corresponds to pressing button. the vehicle. It is not necessary to insert the
remote control in the ignition lock, see page 50.
Reference
33
Switching off the engine in vehicles 1. Remove the integrated key from the remote
Opening and closing
with automatic gearbox control, see page 26.

The engine can be switched off only when the
selector lever is in position P, see page 52.
To switch off the engine with the selector lever
in position N, the remote control must be in the
ignition lock.
Malfunction
The function of the convenient access may be
disturbed by local radio waves.
In this case, open or close the vehicle with the 2. Remove the cover.
door lock using the buttons on the remote con-
3. Insert a new battery with the plus side up.
trol or with the integrated key.
4. Press the cover back into position.
You can subsequently start the engine by
inserting the remote control into the ignition Dispose of the old battery at a collection
lock. point or return it to Service.<
Warning lights
If the warning light in the instrument Window lifts
cluster comes on when you attempt
to start the engine: the engine cannot General
be started. The remote control is not in the vehi- Take the remote control with you when
cle or is malfunctioning. Take the remote con- you leave the car, otherwise children
trol with you into the vehicle or have it checked. could operate the window lifts and possibly
If applicable, try inserting a different remote injure themselves.<
control into the ignition lock.
If the warning light in the instrument
cluster comes on while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
then switched off, it can be restarted only within
approx. 10 seconds.
If the indicator light in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the Control Display:
change the battery in the remote control. Opening
Press the button as far as the pressure
Changing the battery point.
The battery in the remote control for convenient The window opens for as long as the switch is
access requires replacement from time to time. pressed down.
Press the switch beyond the pressure
point.
The window opens automatically.
The process is stopped by pressing the button
again.
34
Closing 2. Pull and hold the switch past the pressure
Overview
To avoid injuries, watch the windows point again within approx. 4 seconds.
closing and ensure that the closing area is The window closes without trap protection.
unobstructed.<
Pull the switch up to the pressure point. Safety switch
The windows close for as long as the This enables you to prevent the rear side win-
switch is held upwards. dows from being opened and closed at the
Controls
switches in the rear seat area, for instance by
Pull the switch beyond the pressure
children.
point.
Press the button.
The window closes automatically.
LED lights up when the safety function
The process is stopped by pressing the switch. is switched on.
Driving hints
Convenient operation, see page 28, using the Press the safety switch when carrying
remote control or door lock. children on the rear seats, otherwise
Convenient closing, see page 33, for conven- careless closing of the windows could result in
ient access*. injury.<
After having switched off the ignition

You can still operate the windows for approx. Panorama glass roof*
Navigation
1 minute after the remote control has been
removed or the ignition switched off. General
The glass roof and the sliding trim can be oper-
Trap protection ated individually or together with the switch.
If the closing force exceeds a certain value dur- To avoid injuries, watch the glass roof
Entertainment
ing closing, the process is aborted. while closing and ensure that the closing
Despite the trap protection function, area of the glass roof is unobstructed.<
make sure that the windows are not Take the remote control with you when
obstructed as they close; if this precaution is you leave the car, otherwise children
not taken, the risk remains that thin objects, for could operate the roof and possibly injure
instance, could fail to interrupt the closing themselves.<
movement.
Do not attach any accessories in the movement Communication
range of the windows in order not to impair the
trap protection function.<
Closing without the trap protection

function
E.g. in the event of an external hazard or if the
windows are iced up that prevents a normal clo-
sure, proceed as follows:
Mobility
1. Pull and hold the switch beyond the pres- Lifting the glass roof
sure point. Press the switch briefly.
The trap protection function is restricted From the closed position, the
and the window opens slightly when the roof is raised and the sliding trim
closing force exceeds a certain value. opens slightly.
Reference
35
Do not close the sliding trim forcibly with risk remains that thin objects, for instance,
Opening and closing
the roof in the raised position, as this could fail to interrupt the closing movement.<
would damage the mechanism.<
Press the switch to the front beyond the pres- Closing without the trap protection
sure point to close the glass roof and the sliding function
trim completely. E.g. proceed as follows if there is external dan-
ger:
Opening/closing the sliding trim 1. Press and hold the switch to the front
Press and hold the switch up to beyond the pressure point.
the pressure point in the desired The trap protection function is restricted
direction. and the roof opens slightly when the closing
Sliding trim moves as long as force exceeds a certain value.
you hold the switch. 2. Press the switch to the front beyond the
Press the switch beyond the pressure point in pressure point again and hold until the roof
the desired direction. closes without active trap protection.
Sliding trim moves automatically.
Touching the switch stops the movement. Initialising after power cut
It is possible that the roof may only be lifted
Opening/closing glass roof and sliding after a power cut.
trim together Have system initialised by your Service.
Press the switch beyond the
pressure point twice in the
desired direction.
Glass roof and sliding roof move
together. Stop the movement by
pressing the switch again.
Convenient operation, see page 28, using the
remote control or door lock.
Convenient closing, see page 33, for conven-
ient access*.
After the ignition is switched off

You can still operate the roof for approx.
1 minute after the remote control has been
removed or the ignition switched off.
Trap protection
If the closing force exceeds a certain value dur-
ing closure of the glass roof, the closing proce-
dure is stopped as from the centre of the roof
opening or during closure from raised position.
The roof is subsequently opened a little.
Despite the trap protection function,
make sure that the roof is not obstructed
as it closes; if this precaution is not taken, the
36
Adjusting
Overview
Safe seated position forward or back to make sure it engages prop-
erly.
A seated position that suitably reflects your
requirements is a vital condition of relaxed driv- Height
ing with a minimum of fatigue.
Controls
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
In the event of an accident the seat position lift it off, as necessary.
plays an important role in combination with:
> Seatbelts, see page 41 Backrest
> Head restraints, see page 39
Driving hints
> Airbags, see page 83
Seats
Before adjusting, note
Do not adjust the driver's seat when driv-
Navigation
ing.
The seat could move unexpectedly, leading to Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-
the driver losing control of the vehicle, so that rest or lift it off, as necessary.
an accident could be caused.<
Do not lean the backrest of the front pas- Jog*
Entertainment
senger's seat backwards when the vehi-
cle is moving. Otherwise there is the risk of slid-
ing under the seatbelt in the event of an
accident. The protective effect of the seatbelt is
lost.<
Adjusting manually
Communication
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat

or lift it off, as necessary.
Mobility
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
Reference
37
Thigh support* Lumbar support*
Adjusting
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for- The seat back contour can be altered to support
ward or back. the lordosis, the curvature of the lumbar section
of the spine.
Electrical adjustment The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal col-
umn are supported, to encourage an upright but
relaxed seated position.
> To increase or reduce the curvature: press
the switch at front or rear.
> To move the curved section up or down:
press the switch at top or bottom.
Backrest width*
1 Longitudinal direction*
2 Height
3 Jog*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit

your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-
eral-support pads.
Press the switch at front or rear.
Backrest width decreases or increases accord-
4 Backrest
ingly.
The head restraints are adjusted manually, see
Head restraints below. Adjusting the rear seat backs
Adjustment of the backrest inclination, see
page 101.
38
Head restraints Rear
Overview
Correctly adjusted head restraints Adjusting height
A correctly positioned head restraint reduces
the risk of neck injury in the event of an acci-
dent.
Adjust the head restraint to the correct
Controls
height on all occupied seats, otherwise
there is an increased risk of injury during an
accident.<
Height
Driving hints
Adjust the headrest so that its centre is approx. > Up: pull.
at the height of the ears. > Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint down.
Distance The centre head restraint is not height-adjusta-
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is ble.
as near to the back of the head as possible.
Removing at the front and back
Front
Navigation
Only remove the head restraints if no person is
travelling in the corresponding seat.
Adjusting height
1. Pull up all the way.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint all the way out while the rear seat
Entertainment
backrest is slightly folded forward.
Install the head restraints before carrying
persons, otherwise there is no protective
function of the head restraint.<
Communication
> Up: pull.
Seat heating*
> Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint down.
Mobility
Switching on
Press once per temperature stage.
Highest temperature stage when three
Reference
LEDs light up.
39
Switching off Calling up
Adjusting
Press and do not immediately release the but- Do not call up memory while you are driv-
ton. ing, as unexpected seat movement could
LEDs go off. result in an accident.<
If you continue the journey within approx.
15 minutes, seat heating is activated automati- Convenience function
cally at the temperature last set. 1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
If necessary, the temperature is reduced - up to on radio ready state, see page 50.
and including switching off - to prevent battery 2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
discharge. The LEDs stay lit up. or 2.
The setting is automatically moved to the final
position.
Seat and mirror memory* The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you press a seat adjustment switch or
General touch one of the memory buttons.
Two different driver's seat and rear-view mirror
positions can be saved and called up. Settings Safety function
for the seat back width and lumbar support are
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
not stored in memory.
tion on or off, see page 50.
Memorising 2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2

until the adjusting procedure is completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED will go off.
Calling up with the remote control

The driver's seat position last set is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
You can select whether the seat is reset to that
position automatically.
1. Switch on the radio ready state or the igni- When this Personal Profile function is
tion, see page 50. used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
2. Adjust the seat and outside mirrors to the
Otherwise, persons could be injured or objects
desired positions.
could be damaged should the seat start to
3. Press the button. move towards the rear.<
LED in the button lights up.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2. when you press a seat adjustment switch or
LED goes off. touch one of the memory buttons.
The driver's seat and outside mirror posi-
tions are stored for the remote control cur- Selecting automatic call-up
rently in use. 1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
40
3. "Last seat position aut." Adjustment for automatic
Overview
retracting seat belts
Draw the buckle tongue attached to the seat
belt across the body and press it into the buckle
catch until a 'click' is heard.
Adjustment of the belt length is very important.
To adjust the lap belt and check whether the
Controls
buckle has locked correctly, pull upwards on the
shoulder strap until the lap belt fits tightly.
The length of the diagonal shoulder strap
Automatic call-up of the last seat position is adjusts itself automatically to allow freedom of
switched on and is stored for the remote control movement.
Driving hints
currently in use. To release the seat belt, press the button on the
buckle catch unit.
Switching off automatic call-up Seat belts are designed to bear upon the
Deactivate "Last seat position automatically". bony structure of the body and should be
worn low across the front of the pelvis, or the
pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable.
Seat belts Wearing the lap section of the belt across the
Navigation
abdominal area must be avoided.
General Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as pos-
sible, consistent with comfort, to provide the
Fasten the seatbelt on every occupied seat
protection for which they have been designed.
before each journey.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection
The airbags are a complementary safety feature afforded to the wearer.
Entertainment
and not a substitute for the seat belts. Care should be taken to avoid contamination of
the webbing by polishes, oils and chemicals
Number of seat belts and particularly battery acid. Cleaning may
Your vehicle has five seat belts for your safety safely be carried out using mild soap and water.
and the safety of your passengers. However, The belt should be replaced if webbing
they can offer protection only when used cor- becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged.
rectly.
Communication
Belts should not be worn with straps twisted.
> The upper belt anchorage is suitable for It is essential to replace the entire assembly
adults of any stature as long as they are sit- after it has been worn in a severe impact even if
ting correctly. damage to the assembly is not obvious.<
> Both rear buckles, integrated into the rear No modifications or additions should be
passenger compartment are designed for made by the user which will either prevent
passengers sitting on the left and right. the seat belt adjusting devices from operating
to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assem-
> In the rear passenger compartment, the
bly from being adjusted to remove slack.<
centre belt buckle marked CENTER is
Mobility
solely intended for the rear centre passen- Never restrain more than one person with
ger. each seat belt. Babies or small children
must not travel on the lap of another occu-
> If the rear centre seat belt is used, the left
pant.<
backrest must be locked into position, see
page 101, otherwise the centre seat belt Fasten the seat belt firmly and without
twisting it over pelvis and shoulders as
Reference
will not have any restraining effect.

near to the body as possible and making sure in
41
the pelvic area that it is situated on the hip and Damaged seat belts
Adjusting
does not press on the stomach. Otherwise the If the seat belts have been exposed to loads in
belt can slide over the hip in the event of a head- an accident or damaged in any way:
on collision and injure the stomach.
Replace the seat belt system and the belt ten-
The seat belt must not pass across the neck. It
sioner and have the belt anchorage checked.
should not be pulled across sharp edges or
routed or fastened over hard or fragile Check and replace the seat belts. Have
objects.< the repair work carried out only by your
Service otherwise the correct function of the
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regu-
seat belt system cannot be ensured.<
larly pull the belt taut in the upper body
area, otherwise its restraining effect could be
impaired.<
Mirrors
Fastening the buckle
Outside mirrors
General
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
than they appear. Do not gauge your dis-
tance from following traffic based on what you
see in the mirror; otherwise there is an
increased risk of accident.<
Overview
The seat belt buckle must be heard to engage.
Opening the buckle

1. Hold onto the belt.
2. Press the red button on the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back up to the reel.
Fasten seat belt reminder for driver's

and front passenger's seat*
The indicator light comes on and an 1 Adjusting
acoustic signal sounds. In addition, a 2 Folding outside mirrors in and out*
message will appear on the Control
3 Left/right, parking position function*
Display. Check whether the seat belt has been
fastened correctly.
Selecting a mirror
The 'Fasten seat belts' reminder is issued as
Switching to another mirror:
long as the driver's seat belt has not been fas-
tened. Slide the mirror switch.
The 'Fasten seat belts' reminder is also acti-

Electrical adjustment
vated at road speeds above approx. 8 km/h,
approx. 5 mph, if the front passenger's seat belt Analogue to the button movement.
is not fastened, if objects are placed on the front
passenger seat, or if driver or front passenger
unfasten their seat belts.
42
Storing the positions* Inside mirror
Overview
Seat and mirror memory, see page 40.
Reducing the dazzling effect
Adjusting manually
Press on the edges of the mirror pane in the
event of an electrical defect, for example.
Parking position function*
Controls
If the vehicle is in reverse gear, the mirror pane
on the front passenger side tilts slightly to the
bottom. This increases the view of the kerb or
other obstructions near the ground, e.g. when
Driving hints
parking. From the back when driving at night: turn the
To activate: button.
1. Slide the mirror switch into the driver posi-
tion.
Inside and outside mirrors, automatic-
dim*
2. Engage reverse gear or selector lever posi-
tion R.
The parking position function is deactivated
Navigation
during trailer towing*.
To deactivate:
Slide the mirror switch in the front passenger
position.
Entertainment
Folding in and out*
Press button 2. Two photo cells control the unit:
Possible up to 20 km/h or 13 mph. > In the mirror pane, see arrow
Can be of advantage, e.g. > On the back of the mirror
> In the car wash For proper functionality:
Communication
> In narrow streets > Keep photo cells clean
> To fold manually folded mirror out again. > Do not cover the area between the inside
Before driving into a car wash, fold the mirror and the windscreen
mirrors in manually or with the button,
otherwise they could be damaged due to the
width of the vehicle.< Steering wheel
Automatic heating General
Depending on the outside temperature, both Do not adjust the steering wheel position
Mobility
outside mirrors are automatically heated while while the vehicle is in motion, or an acci-
the engine is running or the ignition switched dent may result from any unexpected move-
on. ment.<
Reference
43
Adjusting
Adjusting
1. Fold lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Electrical steering wheel lock*

The steering wheel locks or unlocks automati-
cally when the remote control is removed or
inserted, see page 50.
44
Child safety
Overview
Important considerations Fitting child restraint
Do not leave children unattended in the systems
vehicle, as they could otherwise endan- A corresponding child restraint system is avail-
ger themselves and/or other persons by open-
Controls
able from your Service for any age group or
ing the doors, for example.< weight category.
Adapt the inclination of the centre rest and the
Not for Australia/New Zealand: suitable
respective outside rest before fitting child
seats
restraint systems on the rear outer seats.
In general, the front passenger's seat and rear
Driving hints
After installing the child restraint system move
outer seats are suitable for the installation of
both rests to the front, if applicable, so the rests
universal child restraint systems for all age
are slightly in contact with the child restraint
groups, provided these have been approved for
system.
the age group in question.
When selecting, installing and using child
Always carry children at the rear restraint systems, observe the manufac-
turer's instructions, otherwise the protective
Accident research has shown that the safest
Navigation
effect could be impaired.<
place for children is on the rear seats.
Following an accident, have all compo-
Children under 12 years of age or smaller
nents of the child restraint system and the
than 150 cm, approx. 5 feet, should
seat belt that was used to secure it checked by
always travel on the rear outer seats using suit-
BMW Service and replaced if necessary.
able child restraint systems, otherwise there is a
Entertainment
Have this type of work carried out only by your
greater risk of injury in the event of an acci-
Service.<
dent.<
For Australia/New Zealand: installation

Not for Australia/New Zealand: children
of child restraint systems
on the front passenger seat
Since your vehicle is equipped with a front air-
Please make sure that the front and the side air-
bag system for the front passenger's seat, the
Communication
bags on the front passenger side have been
following warning is applicable:
turned off if it becomes necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger seat. It is recommended not to use any
The front passenger airbags cannot be deacti- kind of child restraint system on
vated unless the vehicle is fitted with a keys- the front passenger's seat.
witch for the front passenger airbags, see
page 85. Extreme Hazard
If you are using a child restraint system on Do not use a rearward facing child
the front passenger side, the front pas- restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in
senger airbags must be deactivated, otherwise
Mobility
front of it, as otherwise there is an increased risk

there is an increased risk of injury to the child, of injury in the event of the airbag deploying.<
even with a child restraint system.<
Reference
45
Not for Australia/New Zealand: on the Suitable ISOFIX child restraint systems
Child safety
front passenger's seat The following ISOFIX child restraint systems

Make sure that the front and side airbags on the may be used on the rear outer seats. The
front passenger side are switched off before respective categories (letters) or ISO data is
installing a child restraint system on the front stated on the child restraint system.
passenger seat. On the rear seats
If you are using a child restraint system on A - ISO / F3 D - ISO / R2
the front passenger side, the front pas-
B - ISO / F2 E - ISO / R1
senger airbags must be deactivated, otherwise
there is an increased risk of injury to the child, B1 - ISO / F2X F - ISO / L1
even with a child restraint system.< C - ISO / R3 G - ISO / L2
Seat position and height

Brackets for lower ISOFIX anchors
Before fitting a universal child restraint system
Make sure that both of the lower ISOFIX
on the front passenger's seat, move the seat
anchors are correctly locked in place and
backwards and upwards as far as it will go in
that the child restraint system is seated firmly
order to achieve the best possible routing of the
against the backrest, as otherwise the protec-
seat belt.
tive effect can be diminished.<
Please do not change the position and seating
height afterwards.
Backrest width*
Before installing a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, open the backrest width
completely, see page 38. Do not change the
width of the backrest afterwards.
The backrest width must be completely
open before installing a child restraint
system on the front passenger seat. Do not The brackets for the lower ISOFIX anchors are
change the setting afterwards, otherwise the located beneath the labelled caps.
stability of the child restraint system is Before installing an ISOFIX child restraint sys-
restricted.< tem pull out the seat belt from the area of the
child restraint system anchors.
Not for Australia/New

Zealand: child seat
mountings, ISOFIX
Note
When you are fitting and using ISOFIX
child restraint systems, comply with the
operating and safety instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the system, as otherwise
the protective effect can be diminished.<
46
Upper ISOFIX retaining strap Attach upper retaining strap to
Overview
mounting point
Mounting points 1. Push the head restraint upwards.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint posts.
3. Hook in the hook for the retaining strap into
the lashing eyes.
Controls
4. Pull the retaining strap taut.
5. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
Driving hints
For ISOFIX child restraint systems with an
upper retaining strap there are two additional For Australia/New Zealand:
mounting points, see arrows. child restraint systems
Use the mounting points for the upper In accordance with ADR 34/01, provisions have
ISOFIX retaining strap only to secure been made to allow installation of a child
child restraint systems; otherwise, the mount- restraint system at each rear seating position.
ing points could be damaged.<
The attaching clip which is part of the upper
Navigation
anchorage strap of a child restraint system –
Guiding the retaining strap AS 1754 – can be attached directly to the corre-
Make sure that the upper retaining strap sponding anchor fitting.
does not pass over sharp edges and is not Please refer strictly to the installation instruc-
twisted on its path to the upper mounting point. tions supplied with the child restraint system.
Otherwise the child restraint system cannot
Entertainment
protect the child as intended in the event of an Each seating position is fitted with a head rest.
accident.<
Mounting points
Communication
1 Direction of travel
The child restraint anchor fittings, see arrows,
2 Head restraint are located at the rear of the seat backs of the
3 Luggage compartment floor second seat row.
Mobility
4 Hook for the upper retaining strap

Routing of the strap on the outer
5 Mounting points/lashing eyes
seating positions
6 Seat backrest Do not route the strap of the child
7 Upper retaining strap restraint system over the head rest or
Reference
over sharp edges and do not twist the strap, as
47
otherwise the protective effect of the child the interior boot lid to ensure proper fixing of the
Child safety
restraint system is not given.< child restraint system.<
Routing of the strap on the centre

seating position
1 Forward driving direction

2 Head rest
3 Load area floor 1 Forward driving direction
4 Attaching clip 2 Head rest
5 Child restraint anchor fitting 3 Load area floor
6 Seat back 4 Attaching clip
7 Strap of the child restraint system 5 Child restraint anchor fitting
6 Seat back
Attaching the strap of the child
restraint system 7 Strap of the child restraint system
1. Lift the head rest.
Attaching the strap of the child
2. Pass the strap of the child restraint system restraint system
between the head rest and the seat back
1. Place the strap of the child restraint system
and also between the two supports of the
in the centre, above the head rest.
head rest.
2. Hook in the attaching clip of the strap into
3. Hook in the attaching clip of the strap into
the corresponding anchor fitting.
the corresponding anchor fitting.
3. Pull the strap of the child restraint system
4. Readjust the head rest into the lowest pos-
taut until it presses into the head rest's
sible position.
cushioning so that it is prevented from slip-
5. Tighten the strap of the child restraint sys- ping off.
tem.
Please make sure that the upper strap is

Please make sure that the upper strap is routed between the rear seat back and
routed between the rear seat back and
48
the interieur boot lid to ensure proper fixing of
Overview
the child restraint system.<
Locking doors and windows

Rear doors
Controls
Driving hints
Push down the locking levers on the rear doors.
The respective door can now only be opened
from the outside.
Navigation
Safety switch for the rear of the vehicle
Press the button on the driver door if
children are travelling in the back.
The rear electric windows are locked and can-
Entertainment
not be operated from the rear of the vehicle,
safety switch, see page 35.
Communication
Mobility
Reference
49
Driving
Driving
Ignition lock Automatic gearbox

You cannot take out the remote control unless
Inserting the remote control in the the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
ignition lock
Start/stop button
Insert the remote control fully into the ignition

lock.
> Radio ready state is switched on. The ignition is switched on and off and the
Individual electrical consumers can operate. engine is switched on by pressing the Start/
> The electric steering wheel lock disen- stop button.
gages audibly. The engine starts if you complete the following
Insert the remote control into the ignition steps while pressing the Start/stop button
lock before you move the vehicle, other- > Manual gearbox: depress the clutch
wise the electric steering wheel lock will not dis-
engage and you will not be able to steer the > Automatic gearbox: depress the brake
vehicle.<
Radio ready state
Convenient access* Individual electrical consumers can operate.
With convenient access, only insert the remote The time and the outside temperature are dis-
control in the ignition lock in exceptional cases, played in the instrument cluster.
see page 33. Radio ready state is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
Removing the remote control from the the ignition lock
ignition lock > When you touch the panel above the door
Do not use force to remove the remote lock, if the vehicle is fitted with convenient
control from the ignition lock, as other- access*, see Locking on page 33
wise damage can occur.<
Before removing the remote control, first push Ignition on
it in as far as it will go to release the locking All electrical consumers are ready for operation.
mechanism. The odometer and trip distance recorder are
> The ignition is switched off if it was on displayed in the instrument cluster.
beforehand. When the engine is switched off, please
> The electric steering wheel lock engages switch off the ignition and all electrical
audibly.
50
consumers you are not using, in order to pre- Starting the engine
Overview
serve the battery.<
Radio ready state and ignition off

All indicator lights, warning lights and displays
in the instrument cluster go out.
Controls
Starting the engine
General
Manual gearbox
Never run the engine in enclosed spaces,
as inhaling the harmful exhaust gas can Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
Driving hints
lead to loss of consciousness with fatal conse- venient access, in the vehicle, see page 33.
quences. The exhaust gas contains carbon 1. Depress the brake.
monoxide, which is colourless and odourless, 2. Depress the clutch and shift to idle position.
but highly toxic.<
3. Press the start/stop button.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended with
Starting proceeds automatically for a certain
the engine running, as this constitutes a
time, and ceases automatically as soon as the
hazard.
Navigation
engine has started.
Engage neutral or selector lever position P and
apply the handbrake firmly before leaving the
vehicle with the engine running to prevent the Automatic gearbox
vehicle from rolling unintentionally.< Remote control in the ignition lock or, with con-
venient access, in the vehicle, see page 33.
Avoid starting, stopping and restarting
Entertainment
the engine in rapid succession as well as 1. Depress the brake.
repeated attempts to start the engine if it does 2. Move the selector lever to position P.
not fire. Otherwise unburned or only partially
3. Press the start/stop button.
combusted fuel could reach the catalytic con-
verter, which could overheat and be damaged Starting proceeds automatically for a certain
as a result.< time, and ceases automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Communication
Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle at a
standstill; it is preferable to set off, driving at
Diesel engine
moderate engine speeds.
When the engine is cold and the temperature is
below approx. 06/327, starting may be
delayed by automatic preheating.
A message is displayed.
Stopping the engine

Mobility
General
Take the remote control with you when
you leave the vehicle, otherwise children
could, operate the electric windows for example
Reference
and possibly injure themselves.<
51
When parking on an incline, fully apply the With the vehicle stationary, the engine
Driving
handbrake, otherwise the vehicle could is switched off and the indicator light
begin to roll.< lights up.
The air flow rate of the air conditioner/automatic
Stopping the engine air-conditioning system is reduced.
Manual gearbox Engine is not switched off

1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press the Before the engine is switched off, the system
start/stop button. checks whether certain conditions related to
2. Engage first gear or reverse. safety and comfort have been met.
3. Fully apply the handbrake. In the following situations, the engine is not
4. Remove the remote control from the igni- switched off:
tion lock, see page 50. > Outside temperature below approx. +36/
377
Automatic gearbox > Passenger compartment being heated or
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, move the cooled
selector lever to position P. > With the automatic air-conditioning system
2. Press the start/stop button. switched on, if the windscreen is fogged
3. Fully apply the handbrake. over
4. Remove the remote control from the igni- > Outside temperature high and air condi-
tion lock, see page 50. tioner running
> Engine not yet at operating temperature
> Battery severely depleted, see Vehicle bat-
Automatic start/stop tery on page 214
function* > After reversing
> Driver's seat belt not fastened
The principle
> HDC is enabled
The automatic start/stop function helps you to
save fuel and reduce emissions. To do so, the
Starting the engine
system automatically switches the engine off
while the vehicle is stationary, e.g. in a traffic With the gearshift lever in the idle
jam or at traffic lights; the ignition remains position, depress the clutch.
switched on. As soon as you depress the clutch, The engine is started and the indica-
the engine starts automatically. tor light goes out.
Automatic operation Engine starts automatically

After every engine start, the automatic start/ The shut-down engine starts automatically, e.g.
stop function is on standby. It is activated as in the following situations:
soon as you drive forwards at faster than > Passenger compartment heating up
5 km/h, approx. 3 mph. strongly and air conditioner switched on
> With the automatic air-conditioning system
Stopping the engine switched on, if the windows and windscreen
When rolling to a halt, e.g. at a traffic light, or begin to fog over
when the vehicle is stationary, shift to neutral > Severely depleted battery, see Vehicle bat-
and release the clutch. tery on page 214
52
> Low brake partial vacuum, e.g. due to the Indicator light
Overview
brake pedal being depressed several times The indicator light is lit, and when you
in succession drive off an acoustic signal sounds in
> Vehicle moving off addition. The handbrake is still applied.
Safety function Applying

The engine is not started automati- The lever engages by itself.
Controls
cally if the driver's seat belt or the
engine compartment lid was opened Releasing
after the engine had been shut down automati-
cally. The indicator light lights up. The engine
can only be started using the start/stop button.
Driving hints
Deactivating manually
Raise slightly, press the knob and move the
Navigation
lever down.
In exceptional cases, if the handbrake has
to be used to slow or stop the vehicle, do
not pull the lever up too hard. Keep the knob on
Press the button. the lever held in all the time.
The orange LED lights up.
Entertainment
Otherwise, violent application of the handbrake
With the system deactivated, the engine can could lock the rear wheels and cause the rear of
only be stopped and started using the start/stop the vehicle to skid.<
button. To prevent corrosion or an imbalance
between the brakes on the right and left
Activating manually side, apply the handbrake lightly from time to
Press the button again. time when coasting to a standstill, provided that
The orange LED goes out. it is safe to do so. Communication
The brake lights do not come on when the
Malfunction handbrake is applied.<
The automatic start/stop function no
longer switches the engine off auto-
matically. The indicator light lights up.
You can continue your journey. Have the sys-
tem checked.<
Mobility
Handbrake
The handbrake is primarily intended to prevent
a stationary vehicle from rolling away; it acts on
the rear wheels.
Reference
53
Manual gearbox Displays in the instrument cluster
Driving
The selector lever position is displayed, and the

When shifting in the 5th/6th-gear plane, current gear in manual mode, e.g. M4.
press the shift lever to the right. Other-
wise the engine could be damaged if you inad- Changing selector lever positions
vertently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
> With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
Reverse
out of position P.
Engage this only while the vehicle is standing
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
still. When the gearshift lever is pressed to the
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
left, a slight resistance has to be overcome.
brake, otherwise the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
Automatic gearbox with Apply the brake until you are ready to
move off; this will prevent the vehicle
Steptronic* from creeping when a gear is selected.<
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can
perform manual gearshifts with the Steptronic,
see page 55.
Stopping the vehicle

Before leaving the vehicle with the engine
running, move the selector lever to posi-
tion P and apply the handbrake to prevent the
vehicle from moving.<
Taking out the remote control A lock prevents inadvertent shifts to the R and P
positions. To disengage the lock press the but-
In order to remove the remote control from the
ton on the front of the selector lever, see arrow.
ignition lock, you must first move the selector
lever to position P and switch off the engine:
P Park
interlock. Remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, see page 50. Engage this only while the vehicle is standing
still. The rear wheels are locked.
Selector lever positions
R Reverse
P R N D M/S + –
Engage this only while the vehicle is standing
still.
54
N Neutral > To shift up: push the selector lever to the
Overview
E.g. select in the car wash. The vehicle will be back.
able to roll. Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at
suitable engine and road speeds; for example,
D Drive, automatic position the gearbox will not shift down if the resulting
Use this position for all normal driving. All for- engine speed would be too high. The gear
ward gears are selected automatically. selected is briefly displayed in the instrument
cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.
Controls
Kick-down
Shifting gears using the shift paddles*
Maximum performance is achieved by the kick-
on the steering wheel
down. Depress the accelerator beyond the
resistance at the point of full throttle. The shift paddles make it possible to change
gears quickly as both hands can remain on the
Driving hints
Sport program and M/S manual-shift steering wheel.
mode > When you shift gears in automatic mode via
the shift paddles on the steering wheel, the
Activating the sport programme gearbox switches to manual mode.
> If you do not use the shift paddles to change
gears and do not accelerate for a certain
amount of time, the gearbox switches back
Navigation
to automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear
plane, manual mode remains active.<
Entertainment
Push the selector lever to the left from position
D.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
This position is recommended for a perform-
ance-oriented driving style.
To deactivate the Sport program or the M/S Communication
manual mode, move the selector lever to the > To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
right into position D. paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift
Activating manual mode M/S paddle -.
Push the selector lever to the left from position Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at
D. suitable engine and road speeds; for example,
Push the selector lever to the front and back. the gearbox will not shift down if the resulting
Mobility
Manual mode is activated and the gear is engine speed would be too high. The gear
changed. selected is briefly displayed in the instrument
cluster, followed by the gear actually in use.
The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster, e.g. M1.
> To shift down: push the selector lever to the
Reference
front.
55
Overriding selector lever lock Indicating a turn briefly
Driving
Should the selector lever be stuck in position P Push the lever as far as the pressure point and
despite the ignition being switched on, the hold it there for as long as you wish to indicate a
brake being depressed and the button on the turn.
selector lever being pressed, the selector lever
lock can be overridden: Triple turn signal
1. Unclip the gaiter of the selector lever. Press the lever as far as the pressure point.
2. Pull the gaiter up over the selector lever The turn indicators flash three times.
until the gaiter is inside out. This function may be activated or deactivated:
1. "Settings"
2. "Lights"
3. "Triple turn signal"
3. Using the screwdriver from the toolkit, see

page 207, push the red lever while moving
the selector lever to the desired position at
the same time.
The triple turn signal is activated and stored
for the remote control currently being used.
Turn indicator, high-beam
headlights, headlight flasher High-beam headlights/headlight
flasher
Flashing turn indicators
> High-beam headlight, arrow 1

Push the lever past the pressure point. > Headlight flasher, arrow 2
To cancel the flashing turn indicators, press the
lever as far as the pressure point.
Unusually fast flashing of the turn indicator light
Wiper system
signals a failure of the indicator light. Do not switch the wipers on if they are fro-
When towing, the light may also indicate a fail- zen to the windscreen, otherwise the
ure of the turn indicator light of the trailer. wiper blades and the wiper motor could be
damaged.<
56
If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor, the time
Overview
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall.
The rain sensor is located on the windscreen,
directly in front of the inside mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain

sensor
Controls
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers, or selecting flick wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
Driving hints
rain sensor*
4 Cleaning windscreen and headlights*
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe, or sen-
sitivity of the rain sensor
Press the button, arrow 3.
Switching on wipers LED in the button lights up.
Push the lever upwards, arrow 1.
Navigation
The lever returns to the home position when Setting speed for intermittent wipe or
released. sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn knurled wheel 5 upwards or downwards.
Normal wiper speed
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
Entertainment
Push upwards once.
sensor
The wipers switch to intermittent wipe as the
vehicle comes to a halt. Press button again, arrow 3.
LED goes off.
Fast wiper speed Deactivate the rain sensor in an automatic
Push upwards twice or once beyond the pres- car wash, to prevent the vehicle's wipers
sure point. from being activated inadvertently and dam-
The wipers switch to normal speed as the vehi-

aged.< Communication
cle comes to a halt.
Cleaning windscreen and headlights*
Switching off the wipers and flick wipe Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Push the wiper lever downwards, arrow 2. Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed
on to the windscreen and the wipers are oper-
The lever returns to the home position when
ated briefly.
released.
When the vehicle's lights are switched on, the
> Flick wipe: push down once.
headlights are cleaned simultaneously at prac-
Mobility
> Switching off from normal: push down once. tical intervals.
> Switching off from fast: push down twice. Only operate the washer systems and
cleaning equipment if you are certain that
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor* the fluid will not freeze to the windscreen and
If the vehicle is not fitted with a rain sensor, the interfere with the view ahead. Anti-freeze
Reference
intermittent wipe time is a preset. should therefore be added to the fluid, see
57
Washer fluid. The rear window wiper does not move if the
Driving
Do not run the washer systems if the washer lever is in position 1 before the ignition is
fluid reservoir is empty, or the washer pump will switched on.
be damaged.< To switch on the rear window wiper:
1. Move the lever to its home position.
Windscreen washer jets
2. Select the desired position again.
The windscreen washer jets are heated auto-
matically while the engine is running or the igni- Do not run the washer systems if the res-
tion switched on*. ervoir for washer fluid is empty, or the
washer pump will be damaged.<
Folding the wipers upwards
Important, for example when replacing the
wiper blades or folding when there is frost. Washer fluid
1. Switch off ignition.
General
2. If there is the risk of frost, make sure that the
Anti-freeze for the washer fluid is highly
wiper blades are not frozen to the wind-
flammable. For this reason, keep away
screen.
from ignition sources.
3. Push the wiper lever upwards beyond the Only keep in the closed original container and
pressure point and hold for approx. 3 sec- store out of reach of children.
onds until the wipers are secured in an Please observe the information on the con-
almost vertical position. tainer.<
After folding the wiper blades down the wiper
system must be reactivated, see page 56. Washer fluid reservoir
Fold the wipers down onto the wind- Only fill wiper fluid when the engine is
screen before turning on the ignition, oth- turned off and subsequently close the lid
erwise damage could occur upon activation of completely to avoid the wiper fluid coming into
the wipers.< contact with hot engine parts.
Otherwise, if the fluid is spilled, there is a risk of
1. Switch on ignition.
fire and personal safety is at risk.<
2. Push the wiper lever downwards. Wipers
move to the deactivated position and are
ready for operation.
Rear window wiper
All washer jets are served by a single reservoir.

When filling with water, to which anti-freeze has
been added if required, always follow the man-
ufacturer's instructions.
1 Intermittent wipe. When reverse gear is Mix the wiper fluid before filling to adhere to the
engaged, continuous operation is activated. mixing ratio.
2 Cleaning the rear window
58
Capacity 4 Recalling a speed memorised beforehand
Overview
Approx. 6 litres or 1.3 Imp. gal.
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2.
Cruise control* The vehicle's current speed is memorised and
maintained. It is displayed in the speedometer
The principle and briefly in the instrument cluster.
Controls
The system is functional as from a speed of On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph. maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. On downhill gradients, the
The speed that was specified with the lever on
system will brake the vehicle slightly if engine
the steering column is maintained.
braking alone is insufficient.
The system also breaks on downhill gradients if
Driving hints
the engine brake is not sufficient. Increasing desired speed
Do not use the system if adverse condi- Press the lever repeatedly to the pressure point
tions do not allow driving at a constant or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is
speed, such as: set.
> On winding roads > Each time the lever is pressed to the pres-
> In increased traffic sure point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph.
Navigation
> In the event of icy roads, fog, snow, rain or
loose ground > Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
Otherwise you could lose control of the vehicle pressure point, the desired speed is
and cause an accident as a result.< increased to the next multiple of 10 km/h or
5 mph on the speedometer display.
Manual gearbox The system memorises and maintains the
Entertainment
You can shift gears while cruise control is acti- speed.
vated. When you drive for an extended period at
very low engine speeds, the system is deacti- Accelerating using the lever
vated. Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the pressure point, arrow 1,
One lever for all functions until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly: Communication
Press the lever beyond the pressure point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without the accelerator
pedal being pressed. The system memorises
and maintains the speed.
Reducing speed
Mobility
Pull the lever repeatedly, arrow 2, until the

1 Memorising and maintaining speed or
desired speed is displayed.
accelerating
Functions analogous to increasing desired
2 Memorising and maintaining speed or
speed, except that the speed is reduced.
decelerating
Reference
3 Deactivating cruise control
59
Deactivating cruise control Displays in the instrument cluster
Driving
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.

The displays in the speedometer disappear.
The system is also automatically turned off if:
> You apply the brake
> You shift gears very slowly in an automatic
gearbox or shift into neutral
> You select selector lever position N in an
automatic gearbox
> You activate DTC or deactivate DSC 1 Memorised speed
> DSC or ABS is intervening 2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
Cruise control is not deactivated by pressing If the display --- km/h or --- mph is shown
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator briefly, it is possible that not all conditions
pedal is released, the memorised speed is again required for operation are fulfilled at the
achieved and maintained. moment.
Calling up Check Control messages, see
Warning light page 70.
The warning light lights up when
cruise control has been deactivated, Malfunction
e.g. as a result of DSC intervening. A The warning light comes on when the
message appears on the Control Display. system has failed. A message
appears on the Control Display. You
Recalling a speed memorised can find more information as from page 69.
beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4. The speed last mem-
orised is recalled and maintained.
The memorised speed value is deleted and can
no longer be called up in the following
instances:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening
> Manual gearbox: when you shift gears very
slowly or shift to idle position
> Automatic gearbox: when you move the
selector lever to position N
> When the ignition is switched off
60
Everything under control
Overview
Distance recorder, outside should therefore drive carefully over bridges
and shaded roads, for example; otherwise there
temperature display, clock is an increased risk of accidents.<
Controls
Distance recorder – odometer – and trip
distance recorder
Resetting trip distance recorder:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
Driving hints
Vehicle parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
1 Knob in the instrument cluster perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
2 Outside temperature display and clock
tion lock:
3 Distance recorder – odometer – and trip dis- Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
tance recorder
Navigation
Knob in the instrument cluster Revolution counter
Press the button.
> The trip distance recorder is reset if the
ignition is on.
Entertainment
> If the ignition is turned off, the time, outside
temperature and distance recorder are dis-
played.
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, km or
miles for the odometer as well as 6 or 7 for Communication
Never force the engine speed up into the red
the outside temperature, see page 65.
warning field, see arrow. In this zone the fuel
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
rently in use.
Revolution counter with warning field*: warning
field and red warning field change depending on
Time, outside temperature display
the engine temperature. The permissible
Setting the clock, see page 68. engine speed increases with increasing engine
temperature.
Outside temperature warning
Mobility
Once the temperature reading falls to +36/

377, a signal sounds and a warning light Coolant temperature
comes on. There is an increased risk of icy
roads. Should the coolant and therefore the engine
become too hot, a warning light will come on. In
There is also an increased risk of icy roads
Reference
in temperatures over +36/377. You
61
addition, a message will appear on the Control Fuel gauge
Display.
Checking coolant level, see page 201.
Current fuel consumption*
Fuel tank capacity:

> Petrol engine: approx. 63 litres, approx.
13.9 Imp. gal.
> Diesel engine: approx. 61 litres, approx.
13.4 Imp. gal.
Shows the momentary fuel consumption. You
can check how efficient and environmentally- Vehicle inclination can cause fluctuations in the
friendly your driving is. display.
Information on refuelling, see page 190.
Engine oil temperature* Range

After reaching the reserve amount:
> A message is displayed briefly.
> The remaining range is displayed on the on-
board computer.
With a remaining range of under approx. 50 km
or 30 miles the message is continuously dis-
played.
If the remaining operating range is below
50 km, approx. 30 miles, it is imperative to
> Cold engine: the indicator is in the low tem- add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are
perature range. Drive with moderate engine not assured and damage may occur.<
speed and speed.
> Normal operating temperature: the indica-
tor is between approx. 1006 and approx.
1206, approx. 2127 and approx. 2487.
> Hot engine: the indicator is in the high tem-
perature range. Switch the engine off
immediately and let it cool down.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Check engine oil level, see page 198.
62
Computer Average speed
Overview
The calculation does not consider the vehicle
Call up information in the instrument being at a standstill with the engine turned off.
cluster With the journey computer, see page 64, you
can have the average speed for another trip dis-
played.
To reset the average speed: press the button in
Controls
the turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption

Is calculated for the time when the engine is
running.
Driving hints
You can have the average consumption for
Press the BC button on the turn indicator lever. another trip displayed, see 'Displays on the
Information is displayed on the instrument clus- Control Display' below.
ter. To reset the average consumption: press the
button in the turn indicator lever for approx.
Overview of the information 2 seconds.
By pressing the button on the turn indicator
Navigation
lever the information is displayed in the instru- Current fuel consumption*
ment cluster in the following sequence: Shows the momentary fuel consumption. You
> Range can check how efficient and environmentally-
> Average speed friendly your driving is.
> Average fuel consumption
Entertainment
Displays on the Control Display
> Current fuel consumption*
Displaying the on-board computer or journey
> No information computer on the Control Display.
To set the corresponding units of measure, see 1. "Vehicle information"
Units of measure on page 65.
2. "On-board computer" or "Journey compu-
ter"
Information in detail
Communication
Range
This display indicates how far the vehicle can
probably be driven on the fuel remaining in the
tank.
It is calculated on the basis of the driving style
over the last 30 km or 20 miles and the current
driving style.
Mobility

add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are
not assured and damage may occur.<
Reference
63
Displays in the "On-board computer": 1. "Vehicle information"
2. "Journey computer"
3. "Reset"
Gearshift point display*

The principle
This system recommends the most fuel-effi-
cient gear for the current driving situation. If it
> Range recommends a different, more fuel-efficient
gear, this is indicated by a display to shift up or
> Distance to destination
down.
> Estimated arrival time, if:
> A distance has been entered manually in Enabling/disabling the system
the on-board computer, see below.
> A destination has been entered in the
navigation system*, see page 119.
Displays in the "Journey computer":
If no information is displayed on the on-board

computer, see page 63, press the BC button on
the turn indicator lever for approx. 3 seconds.
Displays
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Distance to be driven
For both displays:
> The average speed and
> Average fuel consumption are displayed.
Resetting fuel consumption and speed

Resetting the values for average speed and
1 Most fuel-efficient gear
average fuel consumption:
2 Drive more fuel-efficiently, shift up into the
1. Select the respective menu item and press
displayed gear
the controller.
3 Drive more fuel-efficiently, shift down into
2. Press the controller again to confirm.
the displayed gear
Resetting the Journey computer As usual, you can call up the information of the
on-board computer.
Resetting all values:
64
Settings and information Symbol Function
Overview
Setting the clock 68
Operating principle
Some settings and information can only be
changed or displayed when the ignition is
turned on. Some settings cannot be changed
while the vehicle is in motion.
Date setting 69
Controls
Viewing Next Service
Driving hints
indicator 66
1 Button for:
> Selecting display Exiting displays
> Setting values The outside temperature reading and the time
Navigation
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
2 Button for:
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds. If
> Confirming selected display or set val- required, complete the current setting first.
ues
> Calling up computer information 63
Units of measure
Entertainment
Symbol Function
When the lights are switched Setting the units of measure

on: instrument lighting Dimensions for consumption, trip/distance,
brightness 90 temperature and pressure may be changed.
1. "Settings"
Communication
2. "Language/Units"
Calling up Check
Control 69
Checking engine oil

level* 198
Mobility
3. Select the desired menu item.

4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are saved for the remote control
Reference
currently in use.
65
Next Service indicator Displays
Symbol Function
Next Service indicator
Engine oil
The remaining distance and the date of the next

routine maintenance work appointment are dis-
played immediately after the engine is started Roadworthiness test*
or the engine is switched on.
The service agent can read out current service
requirements from the remote control.
In certain cases and for certain maintenance
work, the remaining distance or due date can be Front brake pads
displayed directly on the instrument cluster.
Rear brake pads
Brake fluid
1. Switch on the ignition, see page 50.
2. Tap button 1 on the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
The sequence of displayed services may vary.
3. Press button 2.
The data for the next routine maintenance work
4. Use button 1 to step through the individual is displayed first.
service items.
Detailed information on the service
requirements
More information on the maintenance scope
can be displayed on the Control Display.
66
1. "Vehicle information" 3. "Service required"
Overview
2. "Vehicle status"
Controls
4. "§ vehicle inspection"
3. "Service required"
Driving hints
Essential maintenance routines and any statu-
tory inspections required are displayed.
More information can be displayed on every
entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit the menu:
Navigation
Jog the controller to the left.
Symbols 5. Call up date input.
No servicing is currently needed. 6. "Date:"

7. Make the settings.
Entertainment
Routine maintenance work or a legally 8. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
required inspection is due soon. Please The year is selected.
make a service appointment. 9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
Service appointment overdue. 10. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
The date input is memorised.
To exit the menu:
Entering appointments*
Communication
Entering appointments for legally required
inspections. Automatic Service notification*
Ensure that the date on the Control Display is Data on the maintenance condition or legally
set correctly, see page 69. required inspections of the vehicle are automat-
1. "Vehicle information" ically transmitted to the Service before they are
2. "Vehicle status" due.
You can check when Service was notified.
Mobility
Reference
67
1. "Vehicle information" 7. Press button 2.
2. "Vehicle status" The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
3. "Options"
4. "Last Teleservice Call"
2. "Settings"
Clock
currently in use, see also Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the clock
In the instrument cluster

To set the 12h/24h format, see Setting the time
format below.
Setting the clock
1. "Settings"
2. "Clock/Date"
1. Tap button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or

down repeatedly until the appropriate sym-
bol appears in the display, accompanied by
the time and the word "SET".
3. "Time:"
2. Press button 2.
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
are displayed and press the controller.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes. are displayed and press the controller.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry. The time is stored.
68
Setting the time format 4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
Overview
1. "Settings" displayed and press the controller.
2. "Clock/Date" 5. Make the setting for month and year

accordingly.
3. "Format:"
The date is memorised.
4. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
Setting the date format
The time format is memorised.
Controls
1. "Settings"
2. "Clock/Date"
Date 3. "Format:"
Driving hints
currently in use, see also Personal Profile on
page 26.
Date setting
In the instrument cluster

To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, see
Navigation
Setting the date format below.
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is memorised.
Check Control
Entertainment
The principle
Check Control monitors vehicle functions and
informs you of a fault in the monitored systems.
1. Tap button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or A Check Control message includes indicator or
warning lights in the instrument cluster, if appli-
Communication
down repeatedly until the appropriate sym-
bol appears in the display, accompanied by cable, an acoustic signal and text messages at
the date and the word "SET". the top of the Control Display.
2. Press button 2.
Indicator and warning lights
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new date.
Mobility
Via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Clock/Date"
Indicator and warning lights can light up in a
Reference
3. "Date:"
variety of combinations and colours.
69
Some lights are checked for proper functioning Hiding Check Control messages
and thus come on briefly when the engine starts

or the ignition is switched on.
Press the BC button on the turn indicator lever.

Some Check Control messages remain in the
indicates that Check Control messages have display until the faults have been rectified.
been stored. You can have the Check Control These messages cannot be hidden.
messages shown later on. If several faults occur, the messages are dis-
played in sequence.
Text messages
Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
Text messages on the top part of the Control they may be marked with the symbol
Displays in combination with a symbol in the shown here.
instrument cluster explain a Check Control
message and the meaning of the indicator and Other Check Control messages are automati-
warning lights. cally hidden after approx. 20 seconds. How-
ever, they are saved and can be displayed again.
Additional text messages Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
More information on the majority of Check Con- they may be marked with the symbol
trol messages can subsequently be displayed, shown here.
e.g. the cause for a fault or the corresponding
action to be taken. For this reason, see the fol- Displaying Check Control messages
lowing. stored in memory
1. Tap button 1 on the turn indicator lever up

In urgent cases, this information will be shown
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
as soon as the corresponding light comes on.
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
Exit the displayed information: nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages.
If a Check Control message has been
70
stored, the corresponding light is shown. It 3. "Warning at:"
Overview
is accompanied by a text message on the
Control Display.
3. Press button 1 to check for other mes-
sages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
Controls
perature and the time.
Displaying Check Control messages

stored in memory
4. Turn the controller until the desired limit is
1. "Vehicle information" displayed.
Driving hints
2. "Vehicle status" 5. Press controller.
3. "Check Control" The speed limit is memorised.
Adopting actual speed as the limit

1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
Navigation
3. "Select current speed"
4. Select a text message.
Entertainment
Speed limit
Enter a speed limit at which a Check Control
message will warn you.
Communication
Repeat warning if the set speed limit was
The actual speed is adopted as the limit value.
undershot once by at least 5 km/h.
Activating/deactivating the speed limit
Displaying, setting or changing the
1. "Settings"
speed limit
1. "Settings" 2. "Speed"
2. "Speed" 3. "Warning"
Mobility
Reference
71
4. Press controller. Brightness
Limit warning is switched on.

Adjusting brightness
The brightness is automatically adjusted to
Settings on the Control ambient light conditions. However, the basic
Display setting can be changed.
1. "Settings"
Language 2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
Setting the language
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"

is obtained.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
4. Select the desired language. rently in use.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- The brightness adjustment may not be immedi-
rently in use. ately recognisable, depending on the condi-
tions of light.
Setting the speech dialogue
Toggle between a standard and short dialogue.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialogue.

rently in use.
72
Technical features for driving comfort and
Overview
safety
Park Distance Control PDC* > Trailer towbars and couplings

> Thin or v-shaped objects
Controls
The principle > Low objects
The rear-view camera* may be activated in > Objects with corners and sharp edges
addition to Park Distance Control PDC, see
Low objects already indicated, such as kerbs,
page 75.
may enter the sensors' dead areas before or
PDC assists you when parking. If you slowly after a continuous audible signal is given.
Driving hints
approach an object in front of or behind your
Higher, protruding objects such as ledges may
vehicle, this is signalled by:
not be detectable.
> Audible warning signals
> Visual display False warnings
Under the following conditions, PDC may dis-
Measurement play warnings although there is not obstruction
Ultra sonic sensors in the bumpers measure the in the sensor area:
Navigation
distance. > In heavy rain
The range is approx. 2 m, approx. 2.2 yards > Due to heavy soiling or icing-up of the sen-
Acoustic warning will only sound when: sors
> The front and both rear sensors detect a > Due to snow-covered sensors
Entertainment
distance of approx. 60 cm or 23.6 in. > Due to uneven road surfaces
> The rear centre sensor detects a distance of > In large right-angled buildings with smooth
approx. 1.50 m or 60 in. walls, e.g. underground car parks
> Due to other ultra sonic sources, e.g. road
Limits of the system
sweepers, steam jet cleaners or fluorescent
PDC is no substitute for your personal tubes
Communication
assessment of the traffic situation. Please
observe the traffic situation around the vehicle Towing a trailer
additionally by looking. Otherwise there is a risk
Rear sensors cannot measure properly. They
of accident from persons or objects that are out
therefore do not come on.
of the reach of the PDC sensors.
Loud sound sources outside or inside the vehi- A message appears on the Control Display.
cle can drown out the PDC signal.<
Avoid approaching an object at speed. Automatic activation
Avoid driving off at speed while the PDC Insert reverse gear or selector lever position R
is still active. when the engine is running or the ignition is
Mobility
Otherwise the system could warn you too late turned on.
due to physical data.<
Switching off automatically
Limits of ultra sonic measurement System switches off and LED goes off:
Detection of objects can reach the limits of > When driving headways for approx. 50 m or
Reference
physical ultra sonic measurement, such as: approx. 55 yards
73
> When driving headways over approx. Volume control
Technical features for driving comfort and safety
30 km/h or 20 mph You can adjust the volume of the PDC warning
If required, switch the system on again. sound, see page 139.
Manually switching it on/off rently in use.
Visual warning
The fact that the vehicle is approaching an
object is shown on the Control Display. Objects
that are further away from the vehicle will
appear on the Control Display before an audible
warning signal is given.
Press the button.
> On: LED light up

> Off: LED goes off
Audible warning signals

An intermittent tone indicates the position of an
object as the vehicle approaches it. If an object The display is appears as soon as PDC is acti-
is detected on the left behind the vehicle, the vated.
acoustic warning signal is emitted from left rear If you last selected rear-view camera vision, it
left loudspeaker. will be displayed once again. Switching over to
The nearer an object is, the shorter the intervals PDC:
are. 1. Select the "Switch off rear view cam-
When the distance to a detected object is less era" symbol on the Control Display.
than approx. 30 cm, approx. 12 in, the signal 2. Press controller.
becomes continuous.
An alternating continuous signal is emitted if rently in use.
there are objects in front of and behind the vehi-
cle. Display in the Control Display
An interval sound is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds: Switching on the rear-view camera
> If you stop in front of an object that is only using iDrive
detected by the sensors on the edges With activated PDC:
> If you are driving along a wall 1. Select the "Rear view camera" symbol.
The acoustic signal is switched off: 2. Press controller.
> If the vehicle moves more than approx. The image of the rear-view camera is displayed.
10 cm or 3.9 in away from an object The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
> If the reverse gear or selector lever position rently in use.
P is engaged.
74
Malfunction The image of the rear-view camera appears if
Overview
the system was activated using iDrive.
Switching off automatically

If the system was automatically activated it is
switched off and the LED goes off if:
> You drive headways for approx. 10 m or
Controls
approx. 11 yards
> You drive headways with approx. 15 km/h or
approx. 9 mph
A check control message is displayed, see If the system was activated manually, see
page 69. below, it is switched off and the LED goes off if:
Driving hints
The areas in front of and behind the vehicle are > When driving headways for approx. 50 m or
displayed in a hatched fashion. PDC has failed. approx. 55 yards
Have the system checked.
> You drive headways over 30 km/h or
To ensure full functionality: 19 mph
> Keep sensors clean and free from ice. If required, switch the system on again.
> When using a high-pressure cleaner, do not
spray the sensors for extended periods of Manually switching it on/off
Navigation
time and only from a distance of at least
30 cm, approx. 12 in.
Rear-view camera*
Entertainment
The principle
The rear-view camera assists during parking
backwards and manoeuvring. For this purpose,
the area behind your vehicle appears in the
Press the button.
Control Display.
Limits of the system > On: LED lights up. Communication

Monitor the traffic situation around the > Off: LED goes off.
vehicle additionally by directly looking If PDC appears, switch on the rear-view camera
around. Otherwise there is an increased risk of using iDrive, see page 74.
accident for persons or objects that are outside
of the camera range.< Assistance function
The rear-view camera cannot detect
higher, protruding objects, e.g. wall pro- Operating requirements
Mobility
jections.< > Rear-view camera is activated.

> Tailgate is completely closed.
Automatic activation
Insert the reverse gear or selector lever position
R while the engine is running or the ignition is
Reference
on.
75
Track lines Parking with track and turning circle
lines
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning cir-
cle lines lead into the edges of the parking
spot.
> Can be included in the image of the rear-

view camera in gearbox position R.
> They help to evaluate required space for
parking and manoeuvring on even road sur-
faces. 2. Turn the steering wheel so that the track
> They depend on the current steering angle lines cover the respective turning circle
and are continuously adapted to the steer- lines.
ing wheel movements.
Insert parking assistance lines using iDrive, see
page 77.
Turning circle lines
Zoom on trailer tow hitch*

The area around the trailer tow hitch can be dis-
played larger to facilitate the attachment of a
trailer.
> Can be inserted in the image of the rear-

view camera.
> Display the smallest possible turning circle
on an even road surface.
> If the steering is angled only one turning cir-
cle line is displayed.
Insert parking assistance lines using iDrive, see
page 77.
The distance of the trailer to the coupling can

be estimated with two static semicircles.
A docking line which depends on the steering
angle helps you to aim at the trailer with the
trailer tow hitch.
76
The zoom function can be displayed with the The zoom on the trailer tow hitch is displayed.
Overview
activated rear-view camera.
Insert the trailer tow hitch using iDrive, see Display on the Control Display
page 77.
Activating the rear-view camera using
Marking an obstruction iDrive
With activated PDC:
Controls
1. Select the "Rear view camera" symbol.
The image of the rear-view camera is displayed.
rently in use.
Driving hints
Brightness
With activated rear-view camera:
> Three dimensional markings can be
1. Select the symbol.
inserted into the image of the rear-view
camera. 2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is reached and press the controller.
The colour shades correspond to those of PDC.
Navigation
Estimating the distance to the displayed object
Contrast
is facilitated.
With activated rear-view camera:
Insert the obstruction markings using iDrive,
see page 77. 1. Select the symbol.
Entertainment
Activating the assistance functions is reached and press the controller.
Several assistance functions may be activated
simultaneously. Camera
The zoom function for trailer towing may only
be activated individually.
Inserting parking assistance lines

1. Select the "Parking help lines" symbol. Communication
Track and turning circle lines are displayed.
Inserting obstruction markings

The lens of the rear-view camera is located in
1. Select the "Obstacle marking" symbol. the handle bar of the tailgate.
2. Press controller. Picture quality is influenced by soiling. Clean
Mobility
Three-dimensional markings are displayed. the lens with a moist, non-scratching cloth.
Inserting the trailer tow hitch*

1. Select the "Trailer tow bar - zoom" sym-
bol.
Reference
77
Driving stability control Deactivating DSC
systems
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when
the brakes are applied.
The vehicle can still be steered during a full
braking. This increases driving safety.
ABS is ready to operate each time the engine is
started.
Press the button for at least 3 seconds;
indicator light for DSC lights up in the
Electronic brake force distribution
instrument cluster. Both Dynamic Traction
The system regulates the braking pressure on Control DTC and DSC are deactivated. The sta-
the rear wheels in order to stabilise the braking bilising and traction-improving effects are no
behaviour. longer available.
In the same way as with a differential interlock,
Braking assistant
brake intervention takes place on the rear axle if
The system enables maximum brake assist- the drive wheels spin severely, improving for-
ance automatically as soon as the brake is rap- ward momentum even if the DSC is disabled.
idly depressed. This enables the braking dis-
tance during a full braking to be as short as Reactivate DSC a soon as possible in order to
support driving stability.
possible. It also makes full use of the advan-
tages offered by ABS.
Activating DSC
Maintain pressure on the brake as long as full
braking is required. Press the button again; indicator light
in the instrument cluster goes off.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
As a check
The principle Indicator light flashes:
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing DSC is regulating the propulsive and
traction when you pull away from rest or accel- braking forces.
erate. Indicator lights light up:
Additionally, DSC detects non-stable driving DSC is deactivated.
conditions like a swerving tail end or a drift of
the front wheels. DSC helps to keep the vehicle
on a safe track within the physical boundaries Dynamic Traction Control DTC
by reducing engine output and by braking indi-
vidual wheels. The principle
It is therefore the driver's responsibility to The DTC system is a variant of the DSC system
adopt a suitable driving style in every sit- but designed for drive.
uation. The system ensures maximum drive with lim-
Not even DSC can overcome the laws of phys- ited driving stability in special road conditions,
ics. e.g. on snow-covered road surfaces.
Do not restrict the available additional safety by
Consequently, you must exercise suitable cau-
driving dangerously.<
tion when driving under these conditions.
78
In the following exceptional situations it may be Performance Control*
Overview
best to activate DTC for a short time: Performance Control improves the agility of
> Driving on slush or on snow-covered road your vehicle. To improve agility, when driving in
surfaces. a sporty way, the rear wheel on the inside of the
> Freeing a vehicle out of deep snow or on curve is braked and a majority of the resulting
loose ground by rocking. brake force is compensated by engine interven-
tion.
> Driving with snow chains.
Controls
Hill Descent Control HDC*
Activating DTC
HDC is an assistant for hill descents that auto-
matically controls the speed on steep downhill
gradients. The vehicle moves with a little more
than double the walking speed with you having
Driving hints
to brake.
You can activate HDC below a speed of approx.
35 km/h, approx. 22 mph. When driving down-
hill the vehicle reduces the speed under approx.
35 km/h or 22 mph to more than double the
walking speed and maintains this speed.
Press the button; indicator light for
The system goes into standby for as long as
Navigation
DTC lights up on the instrument clus- you actively brake. The system does not brake.
ter.
Increasing or decreasing speed
As a check
You can vary this speed within a range of
Indicator light flashes: approx. 5 to 25 km/h, approx. 3 to 16 mph, by
Entertainment
DTC is regulating the propulsive and pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake.
braking forces. You can set a target speed in the same range
Indicator lights light up: using the lever of the cruise control*.
DTC is activated.
Communication
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; DTC indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go off.
xDrive*
xDrive is the all-wheel drive system in your vehi-
cle. xDrive and DSC interact with one another to 1 Increasing speed
further optimise traction and dynamic driving.
Depending on the driving situation and prevail- 2 Reducing speed
Mobility
ing road conditions, the xDrive four-wheel-drive

system distributes driving power variably to the
front and rear axles.
Reference
79
Activating HDC Drive-off assistant with
6-cylinder engines
The system assists you when driving off from
gradients. It is not necessary to use the hand-
brake for this.
1. Hold the vehicle with the brake.
2. Release the footbrake and drive off uninter-
ruptedly.
After releasing the footbrake drive off
Press the button; the LED over the but- uninterruptedly, otherwise the drive off
ton lights up. assistant will not hold the vehicle after approx.
The LED flashes when the vehicle is being 2 seconds and the vehicle will begin to roll
braked automatically. backwards.<
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the LED will go Run Flat Indicator RPA
out. Above approx. 60 km/h, approx.
35 mph, HDC is deactivated automatically. The principle
The system does not measure the tyre pres-
Using HDC sures as such.
With manual gearbox: It detects a pressure loss on the basis of a com-
Use HDC in low gears and in reverse. parison between the speeds at which the indi-
With automatic gearbox: vidual wheels rotate while the vehicle is in
HDC can be used in any drive position. motion.
If a tyre loses pressure, its diameter changes.
Displays in the instrument cluster* This in turn alters the rotational speed of the
corresponding wheel. This is detected and
reported as a flat tyre.
Operating requirements
The system requires initialisation with the cor-
rect tyre pressure to ensure a reliable reporting
of the flat tyre. The system must be reinitialised
every time tyre inflation pressures are cor-
rected, after each change of a wheel or tyre, and
after a trailer has been attached or detached.
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC indicator System limitations
Serious, sudden tyre damage due to
Malfunction external influence cannot be
If the HDC indicator goes out while HDC mode announced.<
is active or does not appear:
A natural, even loss of pressure in all four tyres
HDC is temporarily unavailable due to high
is not detected. Consequently, check the tyre
brake temperature, or DSC has failed.
pressures at regular intervals.
80
In the following situations, the system could be 3. "Confirm tyre pressure"
Overview
slow to respond or operate incorrectly:
> System was not initialised
> Driving on snow-covered or slippery sur-
faces
> Sporty style of driving: high slip at the drive
wheels, high lateral acceleration
Controls
> Driving with snow chains*
Status display
The current status of the Run Flat Indicator can 4. Start the engine – do not drive off.
be shown on the Control Display, e.g. whether 5. Start initialisation with "Confirm tyre pres-
Driving hints
the Run Flat Indicator is active. sure".
1. "Vehicle information" 6. Drive off.
2. "Vehicle status" Initialisation is completed while the vehicle is on
3. "Flat Tyre Monitor" the move, but this can be interrupted at any
time.
Initialisation resumes automatically as soon as
the vehicle starts moving again.
Navigation
Indication of a flat tyre
The warning light shows red. A mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
In addition, an acoustic signal is emit-
Entertainment
ted.
There is a flat tyre or substantial loss of tyre
The status is displayed.
pressure.
Initialising 1. Reduce your speed and carefully stop the

vehicle. Avoid violent or sudden braking and
The adjusted tyre inflation pressure values are
steering manoeuvres.
Communication
taken over during initialising as reference values
to be able to detect a flat tyre. Initialisation is 2. Check whether the vehicle is equipped with
started by confirming the correct inflation pres- standard tyres* or run-flat tyres*.
sures. The symbol identifying run-flat tyres, see
Do not initialise the system when driving with page 195, is the circle with the letters RSC
snow chains*. on the tyre sidewall.
1. "Vehicle information"
What to do in the event of a flat tyre
2. "Vehicle status"
Normal tyres*
Mobility
1. Identify the damaged tyre.

Do this by checking the tyre pressure in all
four tyres.
The pressure gauge of the Mobility System,
Reference
see page 212, can be used for this purpose.
81
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct Do not reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator. In this
pressures, the Run Flat Indicator might not way, the existing message indicating the flat
have been initialised. In this case initialise tyre continues to remind you that the tyre is
the system. damaged. This procedure can be repeated sev-
If it is not possible to identify, contact a eral times.
Service Centre. Moderate your speed and do not exceed
2. Fix the puncture with the Mobility System, 80 km/h or 50 mph.
see page 212. In the event of a loss of tyre inflation pressure
driving characteristics change, e.g. reduced
Run flat tyres* track stability during braking, longer braking
distance and different self-steering proper-
If a tyre has punctured you can continue your
ties.<
journey, driving at speeds up to a maximum of
80 km/h or 50 mph. When a trailer is being towed, heavy trail-
ers in particular can start to snake. For
Do not continue your journey if the vehi-
this reason, do not exceed 60 km/h, approx.
cle is not equipped with run-flat tyres,
35 mph, as otherwise there is a danger that
otherwise a serious accident could occur.<
accidents might occur.<
If you continue a journey with a flat tyre:
Vibrations or loud noise while driving may
1. Avoid violent or sudden braking and steer- point at a definite failure of the tyre.
ing manoeuvres. Reduce speed and stop, otherwise parts of the
2. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h or tyre could come loose and cause an accident.
50 mph. Contact your Service and do not continue your
3. Check the pressures in all four tyres at the trip.<
next opportunity.
If all four tyres are inflated to the correct
pressures, the Run Flat Indicator might not
Servotronic*
have been initialised. In this case initialise
The principle
the system.
The Servotronic varies the steering force
Maximum possible distance with tyre entirely
required to turn the wheels, depending on the
deflated:
speed at which you are driving.
> With low loads: At low speeds, steering power is boosted
1 to 2 persons without luggage: strongly, i.e. less effort is required for steering.
Approx. 250 km, approx. 150 miles Power assistance for the steering diminishes as
> With moderate loads: road speed increases.
2 persons, luggage area full, or 4 persons
without luggage: Malfunction
Approx. 150 km, approx. 90 miles Malfunctions are indicated on the Check Con-
> With a full load or while towing a trailer: trol, see page 69.
4 or more persons, luggage area full:
Approx. 50 km, approx. 30 miles
In the case of minor damage, in particular to the
tyre tread surface, the distance that can be trav-
elled can be extended.
For this purpose, after the message take the
next opportunity to inflate the damaged tyre to a
maximum of 3.5 bar or 50 psi.
82
Dynamic brake lights* On the right: sharp braking.
Overview
The brake lights flash in the event of heavy
braking.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
shortly before coming to a standstill and the
brake lights continue to light up, but no longer
flash.
Controls
Deactivate hazard warning flashers:
> Depress the accelerator.
> Press the hazard warning flashers button.
On the left: normal braking.
Driving hints
Airbags
Navigation
Entertainment
Communication
1 Front airbags Side airbags

2 Head-level airbags The side airbag supports the head and the body
3 Side airbags in the lateral chest area in the event of lateral
impact.
Front airbags
Mobility
Head-level airbags
Front airbags protect the driver and the front
passenger from a head-on impact where the In the event of a lateral impact the head airbag
protection from the seat belts alone is no longer supports the head.
sufficient.
Reference
83
Protective effect > Do not dismantle the airbag occupant
The airbags are not deployed in every crash, restraint system.

e.g. in the event of less severe crashes or rear- > Do not remove the steering wheel.
end collisions. > Never attach any material to the airbag cov-
Even if all these instructions are complied with, ers with adhesive, place material over them
certain injuries as a result of contact with the or modify them in any other way.
airbag cannot be entirely ruled out, depending > Do not modify the individual components of
on the circumstances in which an accident the system or its wiring in any way. This
occurs. includes covers on the steering wheel,
Occupants with sensitive hearing may be sub- instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as
ject to brief and generally temporary impaired well as the sides of the roof lining.<
hearing caused by the ignition and inflation Avoid touching the system's components
noise. immediately after it has deployed, as
Information for the optimum protection of there is a risk of burns.
the airbags Please only commission your Service or a work-
> Keep your distance from the airbags. shop with the required legal explosive authori-
sation to inspect, repair or disassemble and
> Always grip the steering wheel on the rim,
scrap the airbag generators. Otherwise, any
with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9
careless or unskilled interference with the sys-
o'clock positions, to minimise the risk of
tem could lead to its failure or to accidental
injury to the hands or arms in the event of
deployment with the risk of injury.<
the airbag are deployed.
> No other persons, pets or objects should be Operational readiness of the airbag
held or permitted to remain between the air- system
bag and yourself.
> Do not use the front airbag cover on the
front passenger's side as a tray.
> Keep the dashboard and windows in the
area of the passenger's side free, i.e. do not
attach adhesive foil or covers and do not fit
brackets for e.g. navigation devices or
mobile phones.
> Make sure that the front passenger adopts
a correct seated position, e.g. does not rest When the radio ready state, see
feet or legs on the instrument panel; other- page 50, or the ignition is switched on,
wise he/she could sustain leg injuries in the the warning light lights up for a short
event of the deployment of the front airbag. time to indicate that the entire airbag system
> Do not fit seat covers, cushions or other and the belt tensioners are operational.
objects not specifically approved for seats
with integral side airbags to the front seats. Airbag system faulty
> Do not hang items of clothing such as coats > Warning light does not come on when the
or jackets over the backrests. radio ready state or the ignition is switched
> Make sure that passengers do not lean their on.
head against the head or side airbags, oth- > Warning light remains lit.
erwise this could cause injuries should the In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
airbags deploy. have it checked without delay, as there is
84
otherwise the risk that the system will not func- Indicator light for the front passenger
Overview
tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe airbags
accident occurs.<
Keyswitch* for front passenger airbags
Controls
The indicator light for the front passenger air-
Driving hints
bags indicate the functional status of the front
passenger airbags.
Front and side airbags for the front passenger After switching on the ignition the light indi-
can be deactivated and reactivated with the cates if the airbags are activated or deactivated.
integrated key from the remote control.
The indicator light remains on if
Deactivating the front passenger the front passenger airbags
airbags have been deactivated.
Navigation
Insert the key and press it in. The indicator light does not
Hold it in and turn to the stop come on if the front passenger
into the OFF position. Pull the airbags have been activated.
key out at the stop.
Entertainment
Make sure that the switch is in the OFF
position after pulling out the key and that
the indicator light for the front passenger air-
bags lights up, otherwise the airbags are not
deactivated.<
The airbags for the front passenger are deacti-
vated when the switch is in this position. The Communication
airbags for the driver remain fully active.
Once the child restraint system has been
removed, immediately reactivate the airbags for
the front passenger so that they can deploy cor-
rectly in the event of an accident.
Activating the front passenger airbags

Insert the key and press it in.
Mobility
Hold it in and turn it to the stop

into the ON position. Pull the
key out at the stop.
The front passenger airbags are
reactivated and can deploy correctly if the need
Reference
arises.
85
Lights
Lights
Overview If required, switch on the side lights, switch

position 4.
Low-beam headlights
The low-beam headlight lights up if the igni-
tion is turned on.
Welcome lights
Leave the switch in position 2 or 5 when parking
the vehicle: parking lights and interior lights will
light up briefly when the vehicle is unlocked.
1 Headlight beam throw adjustment
2 Automatic driving lights control*, daytime Activating/deactivating the welcome
driving lights*, welcome lights, High-Beam lights
Assistant* and Adaptive Head Light* 1. "Settings"
3 Lights off, daytime driving lights* for Xenon 2. "Lights"
headlights* 3. "Welcome light"
4 Side lights
5 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights
6 Fog lights
7 Rear fog lights*
Side lights/low-beam
headlights, driving lights
control*
The welcome light is activated and stored
for the remote control currently being used.
Side lights
The vehicle is lit up all around, e.g. for
Automatic driving lights control*
parking.
Switch position 2: the low-beam headlights are
Do not leave the side lights on for an extended switched on and off automatically depending on
period of time, otherwise the battery will dis- ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel, twi-
charge and it is possible that you are unable to light, and in precipitation. LED next to the sym-
start the engine. bol lights up.
It is preferable to switch on the right or left park- The headlights may also come on when the sun
ing lights, see page 88. is sitting low on a blue sky.
Opening the driver door when the ignition is Low-beam headlights are always on if the fog
turned off: the outside lighting is automatically lights* are switched on.
switched off of the light switch is in position 2, 3
or 5. The driving lights control function cannot
substitute for your personal judgement of
when it is necessary to switch on the lights.
86
The sensors are unable, for instance, to recog- 3. "Daytime driving lights"
Overview
nise fog or hazy weather. To avoid any safety
risk in such situations, switch on the low-beam
headlights manually.<
Headlight courtesy delay feature

If you activate the headlight flasher after switch-
ing off the ignition, with the lights switched off,
Controls
the low-beam headlights come on and remain
on for a certain time.
Setting the duration or deactivating The daytime driving lights are activated and
stored for the remote control currently being
1. "Settings"
Driving hints
used.
2. "Lights"
3. "Home lights:"
4. Set a time of duration, or 0 s to deactivate Adaptive Head Light*
the function.
The principle
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlight con-
Navigation
trol system that makes it possible to illuminate
the road surface responsively.
The light cones from the headlights are directed
to suit the road ahead on the basis of steering
angle and other parameters.
Entertainment
During sharp turns at speeds up to approxi-
mately 40 km/h or 25 mph, for example in hair-
pin bends or when cornering, the near-side fog
light is switched on to provide cornering light.
rently in use.
This gives you more light and a better view
along the inside line of the bend.
Daytime driving lights*
Communication
The daytime driving lights light up in position 2, Activating
for Xenon headlights* also in switch position 3.
Turn the light switch to position 2, see page 86
when the ignition is turned on.
Activate/deactivate
The cornering lights is automatically activated
1. "Settings"
irrespective of the steering angle or the turn
2. "Lights" indicator.
Standstill function*: to avoid dazzling the driv-
ers of oncoming vehicles, the Adaptive Head
Mobility
Light feature directs light towards the front pas-

senger's side when the vehicle is at standstill.
When you are driving in reverse, only the cor-
nering light is active and lights up the outside
area of the bend.
Reference
87
Malfunction 3 Parking lights*
Lights
A message appears.
Right or left parking lights*
Adaptive Head Light is malfunctioning or has
failed. Have the system checked as soon as The vehicle can be lit up only on one side.
possible.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, push the lever up or
Headlight beam throw down beyond the pressure point for approx. two
adjustment seconds, arrow 3.
The parking lights will discharge the bat-
Halogen headlights tery. Therefore, you should not leave
Adapt the headlight beam throw them on for longer periods of time, as otherwise
of the low-beam headlights by the battery might not have enough power to
turning the knurled wheel, oth- start the engine.<
erwise you will dazzle oncoming
traffic: Switching off
The second value in each case applies when Push the lever in the opposite direction as far as
towing a trailer. the pressure point, arrow 3.
0 / 1 = 1 to 2 persons without luggage

1 / 1 = 5 persons without luggage High-Beam Assistant*
1 / 2 = 5 persons with luggage
2 / 2 = 1 person, luggage area full The principle
Comply with rear axle load limit, see page 225. If the light is switched on this system automati-
cally switches the high-beam headlights on and
Xenon headlights* back off. A sensor on the front of the interior
mirror controls this process. The Assistant
The headlight beam throw is regulated auto-
ensures that the high-beam headlights are
matically, e.g. when accelerating and braking
switched on whenever the traffic situation per-
and to adapt to various loads being carried.
mits this. You can always intervene and switch
the high-beam headlight on and off normally.
High-beam headlights/ Activating the high-beam headlight

parking lights assistant
1. Turn the light switch in position 2 , see
page 86.
2. Jog the turn indicator in the high-beam
direction when the low-beam headlight is
switched on.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster comes on. High-beam and low-
beam headlights are automatically acti-
vated.
1 High-beam headlights The system reacts to lighting of oncoming traf-
fic and vehicles ahead as well as sufficient illu-
2 Headlight flasher
mination, e.g. in built-up areas.
88
Manual high beams and low beams > If the sensor is soiled.
Overview
The sensor is located on the front of the
interior mirror.
Do not cover the area with stickers etc.
Clean the sensor with a little glass cleaner
and a moist cloth.
Activating with iDrive
Controls
1. "Settings"
2. "Lights"
> High-beam headlights on, arrow 1 3. "High beam assistance"
> High-beam headlights off/headlight flash-
Driving hints
ers, arrow 2
Jog the turn indicator towards the high-beam
headlights to reactivate the high-beam assist-
ant.
System limitations
The High-Beam Assistant cannot substi-
Navigation
tute for your personal judgement of when
to use the high-beam headlights. To avoid any High-beam assistant is activated and saved
safety risk, switch to the low-beam headlights for the remote control currently in use.
manually in situations that require this.<
The following situations are examples of when
Entertainment
the system may not work at all or only to a lim- Fog lights
ited extent, making it necessary for you to take
action yourself: Fog lights
> During extremely unfavourable weather Side lights or low-beam headlights must be
conditions such as fog or heavy precipita- switched on.
tion Press the button. The green indicator
Communication
> When trying to detect poorly-illuminated light in the instrument cluster lights
road users such as pedestrians, bicyclists, up.
equestrians or carts, when trains or ships If automatic driving lights control has been acti-
are close to the road, or when game are vated, see page 86, the low-beam headlights
passing across the road come on automatically when the front fog lights
> In sharp bends, on steep crests or hollows, are switched on.
at intersections or when there is half-
obscured oncoming traffic on motorways Rear fog lights
> In poorly illuminated towns or wherever The low-beam headlights or side lights with fog
Mobility
there are highly reflective signs lights must be switched on.

> In low-speed areas Press the button. The yellow indicator
> When the windscreen in front of the inside light in the instrument cluster lights
mirror is covered with condensation, dirt, up.
stickers, labels, etc.
Reference
89
Instrument lighting To protect the battery, all lights inside the
Lights
vehicle are switched off about 8 minutes

You can adjust the brightness of the instrument after the ignition is switched off, see Start/stop
lighting only when the side lights or the low- button on page 50.<
beam headlights are switched on.
Switching the interior light on and off

1. Press button 1 up or down repeatedly until
manually
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis-
play, accompanied by the brightness set- Press the button.
ting and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2. Switching it off permanently: press and hold
button for approx. 3 seconds.
Revoke this condition: jog button.
Reading lights
Press the button.
There are reading lights at the front and rear*

next to the interior lights.
3. Press button 1 up or down to select the

desired brightness.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Interior lights
General
Interior light, footwell light*, the door entry
lighting*, luggage area light and the ground
lights* are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the ground lights are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
90
Climate
Overview
Automatic air conditioning system*
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
1 Manual air distribution see AUTO program below. All you need to do is
Entertainment
2 Maximum cooling select an inside temperature which is comforta-
ble for you.
3 Temperature, left
The following sections inform you in detail
4 AUTO program
about how to adjust the settings.
5 Air flow rate, manual, AUTO intensity
Most settings are saved for the remote control
6 Display currently in use, see also Personal Profile set-
Communication
7 Automatic Air Recirculation Control AUC/ tings on page 27.
recirculated-air mode
8 ALL programme Adjusting air distribution manually
9 Temperature, right The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
10 Defrosting windows air is directed to the windscreen, to
11 Switching cooling function on/off manually the upper body area and to the
12 Rear window heating footwell.
13 Seat heating*, right 39 Automatic air distribution can be switched on
Mobility
again with the AUTO button. The cooling func-

14 Inside temperature sensor, do not cover
tion is then automatically turned on and the
15 Seat heating*, left 39 manually set air distribution deleted.
Preferred interior climate

The AUTO program 4 offers optimal air distri-
Reference
bution and air flow rate for almost all conditions,
91
Temperature The programme is deactivated if the air distri-
Climate
Adjust the desired temperature by bution is manually set or the button is pressed
turning. again.
The automatic air-conditioning

Intensity of the AUTO program
system attains this temperature as
quickly as possible by using maximum cooling If the AUTO programme is activated, the auto-
or heating power if necessary. The temperature matic regulation of air flow rate and air distribu-
is then maintained. tion can be changed:
Avoid switching between different temperature Press the button on the left to
settings in short succession. reduce the intensity. Press the
In such a case the automatic climate control has right side of the button to increase
not got enough time to maintain the set temper- it.
ature. The adjusted intensity is indicated on the dis-
Unconstrained by the outside temperature, the play of the automatic air conditioning system.
highest setting produces the maximum heat
output. Adjusting air flow manually
Unconstrained by the outside temperature, the Switch off the AUTO programme first to be able
lowest setting cools constantly. to adjust the air flow rate manually.
Press the left side of the button to
Maximum cooling reduce air flow. Press the right side
Press the button. of the button to increase it.
The system sets the lowest-possi- If necessary, the air flow rate is reduced - up to
ble temperature, maximum air flow and including switching off - to prevent battery
rate and in recirculated-air mode. discharge. The display remains unchanged.
The air comes out of the outlets for the upper
body area. For this reason, open them. Automatic Air Recirculation Control
AUC/recirculated-air mode
The air is cooled as rapidly as possible:
In the event of unpleasant odours or pollutants
> Above an outside temperature of approx.
in the outside air, the supply of outside air can
0 6/32 °F.
be deactivated. The air inside the vehicle is
> When the engine is running. recirculated.
Press the button repeatedly to
AUTO program select an operating mode:
Press the button.
Air flow rate, air distribution and
> LEDs off: outside air is constantly entering
temperature are controlled auto-
the vehicle.
matically.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
The air is directed to the windscreen, the win-
detects pollutants in the outside air and
dows and to the upper body and footwell,
controls the deactivation automatically.
depending on the adjusted temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences. > Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:
outside air supply is shut off permanently. In
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
the event of condensation, switch off the
switches on the cooling function.
recirculated-air mode and increase the air
A condensation sensor simultaneously controls flow rate, if applicable. Make sure the air can
the programme so that condensation is avoided flow to the windscreen.
as far as possible.
92
The recirculated-air mode should not be Rear window heating
Overview
used continuously for lengthy periods, as Press the button.
the quality of the air inside the vehicle will other-
The heater is switched off auto-
wise gradually deteriorate.<
matically after a certain time.
Using the button on the steering wheel*
Switching the system on/off
Using a button on the steering wheel, see
page 11, you can change quickly between recir- Switching off
Controls
culated-air mode and the previously set operat-
With the blower at its lowest set-
ing mode.
ting, press the left side of the but-
ton to switch off the automatic air-
ALL programme
conditioning system.
Press the button.
Driving hints
All indicator lights, except that for the rear win-
Currently set temperature on the dow heating if it is on, go out.
driver's side is also set on the front
The outside air supply is deactivated as
passenger's side.
soon as the automatic air conditioning
The temperature on the front passenger's side system is switched off. If the air quality deterio-
is simultaneously adjusted if the temperature rates or the windscreen fogs over, switch on the
on the driver's side is changed. system again and increase the air flow rate.<
Navigation
The programme is switched off if the setting is
changed on the front passenger's side or if the Switching on
button is pressed again. Press any button except ALL or the rear window
heater button to reactivate the automatic air-
Defrosting windows conditioning system.
Press the button.
Entertainment
Ice and condensation are removed Ventilation
quickly from the windscreen and
the front windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
function.
Cooling function Communication

Cooling the inside of the vehicle is only possible
if the engine is running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled, dried and 1 Knurled wheels to open and close the air
warmed up again, depending on outlets continuously
the temperature setting. 2 Levers for changing the direction of the air-
Depending on the outside conditions, the wind- flow
Mobility
screen may fog up after the engine has been

switched on. Ventilation for cooling
Pressing the AUTO button automatically Set the outlets so that the air is directed at you,
switches on the cooling function. e.g. in a warmed up vehicle.
Reference
93
Draught-free ventilation
Climate
Direct the outlets so that the air flows past you.
Microfilter/activated charcoal filter

The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air.
The activated charcoal filter cleans the incom-
ing air from gaseous pollutants.
This combined filter is changed by your Service
during routine maintenance work.
94
Interior equipment
Overview
Integrated universal remote Programming
control*
The principle
Controls
The system replaces up to three different hand-
held transmitters of different remote-controlled
units, such as garage doors or lighting systems.
The signal of a hand-held transmitter can be
programmed on one of the three memory but-
Driving hints
tons.
1 Memory buttons, arrow 1
Subsequently you are able to operate the
respective unit with the programmed memory 2 LED, arrow 2
button.
Transmission of the signal is shown by the LED. Fixed-code hand-held transmitter
For your safety, delete the memorised pro- 1. Switch on the ignition, see page 50.
Navigation
grammes before selling the vehicle. 2. Initial operation:
During the programming operation and Press the outer buttons 1 and 3 for approx.
before a programmed system is operated 20 seconds until the LED flashes.
with the universal remote control, make sure All programmes on the memory buttons,
that no persons, animals or objects are within arrow 2, have been deleted.
Entertainment
the pivoting or movement range of the system
3. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis-
in question, as otherwise injury or damage
tance of approx. 5 cm to 20 cm or 2 in to
could result.
7 in.
Comply also with the safety instructions sup-
plied with the original hand-held transmitter.< 4. Press the transmitter button of the hand-
held transmitter and the universal remote
Compatibility control simultaneously.
Communication
If this symbol is printed on the packag- LED flashes slowly.
ing or in the instructions supplied with 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
the hand-held transmitter, you can flashes quickly.
assume that the remote control device will be If the LED does not flash quickly after
compatible with the universal remote control. approx. 15 seconds, change the distance
A list of compatible hand-held transmitter is and repeat the last step.
available from: Installation can be carried out with the engine
> The internet: www.homelink.com running or the ignition turned on.
> The toll-free HomeLink hotline:
Mobility
0800 0466 35465 or alternatively the tele- Malfunction

phone number +49 6838 907 277 is availa- If the system cannot be used after repeatedly
ble in Germany, subject to charges programming it, check if the hand-held trans-
mitter is equipped with an alternating code sys-
tem.
Reference
For this purpose:
95
> Read the instructions of the hand-held 5. Release both buttons as soon as the LED
Interior equipment
transmitter. flashes quickly.

> Press the memory button of the universal If the LED does not flash quickly after
remote control for a longer period of time. approx. 15 seconds, change the distance
If the LED briefly flashes quickly and then lights and repeat the last step.
up for approx. 2 seconds, the hand-held trans-
mitter is equipped with an alternating code sys- Deleting all stored programs
tem. Press the left and right memory button for
In this case, programme the memory buttons as approx. 20 seconds until the LED flashes
described under alternating-code hand-held quickly.
transmitter. All memorised programs are deleted.
The programmes cannot be deleted individu-
Alternating-code hand-held ally.
transmitter
Please refer to the instructions of the unit to be
programmed for information on the possibility Digital compass*
of synchronisation.
Programming will be easier if another person is
available to assist you.
1. Park the vehicle within the range of the
remote controlled unit.
2. Programme the universal remote control as
described above under fixed-code hand-
held transmitter.
3. Establish the location of the button on the
receiver of the device to be operated, e.g.
1 Adjustment button
on the drive system.
2 Display
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be operated. Approximately The display shows you the cardinal or interme-
30 seconds remain for the next step. diate compass direction in which you are cur-
rently driving.
5. Press the programmed memory button of
the universal remote control three times.
Operating principle
The unit can be operated with a running engine
You can call up various functions by pressing
or the ignition switched on.
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a pen or similar item. The following
Reassigning individual programs adjustment options are displayed one after the
1. Switch on ignition. other, depending on how long you keep the
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter at a dis- adjustment button pressed:
tance of approx. 5 cm to 20 cm or 2 in to > Press briefly: switch display on/off
7 in.
> 3 to 6 seconds: set the compass zone
3. Press the memory button of the universal
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate the compass
remote control.
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
4. If the LED flashes slowly after approx.
steering
20 seconds, press the transmit button of
the hand-held transmitter. > 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
96
Setting compass zones
Overview
Set the compass zone corresponding to your pass can function correctly; refer to the map of
vehicle's geographic location, so that the com- the world with compass zones below.
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
Press the adjustment button for approx. and that you have enough space to drive in a
3-4 seconds. The number of the compass zone circle.
set is shown in the display. 2. Set the compass zone that currently
Entertainment
To change the zone setting, briefly press the applies.
adjustment button repeatedly until the display 3. Press the adjustment button for approx.
shows the number of the compass zone corre- 6-7 seconds to call up C. Then drive round
sponding to the current location. at least one full circle at a speed of no more
The compass is operational again after approx. than 7 km/h, approx. 4 mph.
10 seconds. If calibration is successful the C disappears
Communication
and is replaced by the points of the com-
Calibrating the digital compass pass.
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations: Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
> An incorrect compass direction is shown. The digital compass is factory-set to right-hand
or left-hand steering.
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
Set the language
does.
Press the adjustment button for approx.
Mobility
> Not all compass directions are displayed.

12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
Procedure and German, "O".
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
overhead power lines are near your vehicle
10 seconds.
Reference
97
Glove box Front centre arm rest*
Interior equipment
Opening Storage compartment

Depending on the version, the centre armrest
between the front seats contains either a com-
partment with a drinks holder* or the cover for
the snap-in adapter*. For more information on
this mobile phone fixture, see page 177.
Opening*
Pull the handle.

The light in the glove box comes on.
After using the glove box while the vehicle
is moving, close its lid without delay, so
that it cannot cause injury in the event of an
accident.<
Closing Lift up the centre arm rest, see arrow.
Swing lid up.

Adjusting
USB interface for data transfer
Push the centre arm rest in the desired position.
Connection for importing and exporting data on

a USB medium, e.g. music collections, see
page 159.
Rear centre arm rest*
When connecting, bear the following in mind: Reach into the recessed handle, pull to the front
and fold down the centre arm rest.
> Do not force the connector into the USB
interface. Press the centre arm rest firmly into the rear
seat back rest.
> Do not connect any devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
Connection for external audio
> Do not use the USB audio interface for
device
charging external devices.
An external audio device, e.g. a CD or MP3
player, can be connected.
98
> AUX-IN port, see page 160 Luggage area
Overview
> USB audio interface*/additional connection > Tensioning straps on the left side panel to
of a the music player in the mobile phone*, secure small items
see page 160 > Tensioning straps on the luggage compart-
ment floor
> Insertable partition elements for the storage
Storage compartments compartment underneath the floor panel for
Controls
a variable partitioning of the storage com-
Storage facilities partment
On the inside With partition net*: align the partition ele-

ments so that there is enough space in the
> Glove box, see page 98
rear of the storage compartment to place
Driving hints
> Compartments in the centre console the partition net.
> Compartments in the doors > Storage nets in the luggage compartment
> Bottle holders in the doors, see drinks hold- next to the storage compartment
ers on page 99
Luggage area Coat hooks

> Lashing eyes, see page 112 Clothes hooks are located near the handles at
Navigation
> Storage compartment under the floor panel, the back.
see page 104 Hang clothes so that they do not obstruct
> Storage compartment on the left* and right vision while driving.<
> Bag holder, see page 104 Do not hang heavy objects from the
hooks, as they could endanger the vehi-
Entertainment
Storage area package* cle's occupants, e.g. already in case of heavy
For your convenience, there are: braking or sudden swerving.<
On the inside
> Insertable drinks holders, see page 100
Drinks holders
Communication
> Front centre arm rest, see page 98 Notes
> Nets on the backrests of the front seats Use light and shatter-proof containers
> Tensioning straps in the front door storage and do not place hot drinks in them. Oth-
compartments erwise there is an increased risk of injury in the
> Storage compartment for glasses on the event of an accident.<
front passenger side instead of a handle Do not force containers that are too large
Reach into the recessed handle at the stor- into the drinks holders; otherwise dam-
age compartment for glasses and fold open. age could result.<
Fold upwards to close.
Mobility
Front
Do not use the storage compartment for
glasses as a handle. > In the storage compartments in the doors
as bottle holders, e.g. for 1.0 litre bottles
> Centre armrest with integrated drinks
holder Tilt the bottom of the bottle while placing it
in the bottle holder.
Reference
> In the centre armrest
99
Insertable drinks holder* Ashtray/lighter*
Interior equipment
The insertable drinks holder is located in the

compartment under the centre armrest*. Opening
Place the drinks holder in the support at the Lift the lid 2.
centre console.
Emptying
Rear Lift out the insert.
> At the front in the storage compartments in
the doors, e.g. 0.75 litre bottles Lighter
Tilt the bottom of the bottle while placing it Press the lighter 1 when the engine is running
in the bottle holder. or the ignition is on.
> In the centre armrest* The cigarette lighter can be pulled out when it
pops back out.
Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its
knob, otherwise you may get burnt.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
Press the front of the armrest.
Sockets
Lighter holder can be used as a socket for elec-
trical devices up to approx. 200 W at 12 V when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Do not damage the sockets by attempting to
insert unsuitable plugs.
100
Front centre console Luggage area
Overview
Luggage compartment cover
Do not place any objects on the cover, as
they could endanger the vehicle's occu-
pants, e.g. already in case of heavy braking or
sudden swerving.<
Controls
The covers can be removed to store bulky lug-
gage.
Remove the cover or the lighter*. Rear cover

1. Unfasten the retaining straps at the tailgate.
Driving hints
Rear centre console* 2. Lift the cover a little, arrow 1, and pull out of
the brackets to the back, arrows 2.
Navigation
Remove the cover or the lighter*.
Front cover
Entertainment
In the storage compartment
underneath the centre arm rest* 1. Press the cover out of the rear brackets
Access to the socket: simultaneously, arrow.
Remove the cover.
In the luggage compartment*
Communication
2. Pull the cover back and upwards to remove

it from the lateral brackets.
Mobility
Open the cap. Expanding the luggage area

The rear seat backrest is split in a 40-20-40
ratio.
The backrests can be adjusted or folded in 10
steps between the comfortable and transport
Reference
position, as required.
101
In the comfortable position the backrests are in Folding back the backrests
Interior equipment
the far back position, in the transport position When folding back the backrests from the
they are approx. in vertical position. folded position they anchor in the transport
Please observe the information on child position.
restraint systems as from page 45 before fitting Pull the left/right backrest or loop of the centre
such a system. backrest to the front to adjust the desired back-
Comply with the instructions regarding rest inclination or comfortable position.
seat belts on page 41, or there will be Engage and therefore lock the backrests
greater risks to personal safety.< before travelling with any persons on the
rear seats.
Outer backrests Otherwise there is the risk of injury due to unex-
pected movement of the backrests.<
Partition net*
Please make sure that the partition net is
firmly hooked in, otherwise there is an
increased risk of injury.<
The partition net can be installed behind the
front or the back seats.
1. Reach into the recess and pull the lever to Before installation
the front. 1. Remove the pouch with the partition net
2. Anchor or fold the backrest in the desired from the storage compartment under the
position. floor panel in the storage compartment.
On the left side, the outer and centre backrest 2. Remove the partition net from the pouch,
are brought to the front together if both back- roll it out and extend.
rests are in the same position. After using the partition net, fold and roll it
The backrests may be individually adjusted to together and place in the pouch in the same
the back. In this context, you must observe that way that you unfolded it so you can store it
the inclination of the centre backrest cannot be under the floor panel.
positioned behind the left backrest. In this context, please make sure that hooks
and tensioning buckles are not placed on
Centre backrest only the bars.
3. Unfold the partition net until the bars
engage.
Mounting eyes
There are four mounting eyes on the rear of the
rear seat backrests.
1. Pull the loop, arrow.

2. Anchor or fold the backrest in the desired
position.
102
Overview
Controls
> Installation behind the front seats, arrows 1 4. Hook in the hooks 1 into the lashing eyes on
> Installation behind the rear seats, arrows 2 the rear seat backrest at the bottom of the
retaining straps on both sides, arrow.
Driving hints
Label 5. Firmly lash the partition net. For this pur-
Please observe the correct installation of the pose, tension the tensioning straps with the
partition net, i.e. confusing installation in the buckles.
front and back.
Installation behind the front seats
A corresponding label is attached to the parti-
tion net.
Navigation
Installation behind the rear seats
1. If applicable, move the rear backrest to the
front, remove the luggage compartment
cover, see page 101.
2. Fold open the caps 1 of the rear mounts in
Entertainment
the roof lining until they engage.
1. Folding rear seats, see enlarge luggage

compartment.
2. Fold open the front mounts in the roof lining
until they engage.
Communication
3. Insert the partition net bar into the mounts
up to the stop on both sides and push to the
front.
4. Attach the lower hooks on both sides of the
retaining straps into the top lashing eyes on
3. Insert the bar of the partition net 2 on both
the rear seat backrest.
sides up to the stop and push to the front.
5. Firmly lash the partition net. For this pur-
pose, tension the tensioning straps with the
buckles.
Mobility
Removing
Please proceed in the opposite sequence to
remove and stow away the partition net.
> Press both unlocking buttons to fold it
Reference
together, arrows.
103
If required, you can remove the floor panel.
Interior equipment
Lashing eyes
There are lashing eyes in the luggage area for
securing luggage items with nets or tensioning
straps, see page 112.
Bag holders
Floor panel
Storage compartment under the floor

panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
load of 25 kg or 55 lbs for the storage
compartment under the floor panel, as other-
wise damage could result.<
Holder on the left and right at the support for the
Lift the storage compartment at the back, e.g.
luggage compartment cover, arrow, e.g. to
to gain access to the on-board toolkit.
hang shopping bags or carrier bags.
To lift, reach into the recess on the back part of
Please only attach light or suitable items
the floor panel.
to the holders. Otherwise there is a risk of
The storage compartment can be removed, if items flying around, e.g. when braking or when
required. an avoidance manoeuvre is necessary.
Only transport heavy luggage appropriately
Raising the floor panel secured in the luggage area.<
Ski and snowboard bag*

General
The ski and snowboard bag is located in a pro-
tective cover in the luggage compartment.
Please observe the assembly and operating
instructions enclosed in the protective cover.
Reach under the floor panel at the back on the
left and right, lift the panel and press to the front
underneath the gap between the luggage com-
partment floor and the rear seat backrest.
To avoid damage do not apply any load on
the floor panel when it is raised and do not
press it up or downwards or readjust the rear
seat backrests.<
Lower the floor panel before closing the tail-
gate. For this purpose, pull the floor panel to the
back at the top of the gap.
104
105
Driving hints
Here is a variety of information
that you may need in particular
driving situations or operating modes.

Driving precautions
Driving precautions
Running in maximum efficiency. Operate the clutch gently

while running it in.
General
After fitting new parts
Moving parts require some time before they can
interact smoothly with one another. The same running-in instructions should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
The following instructions are intended to help
above have to be replaced in the course of the
you ensure that your vehicle achieves its opti-
vehicle's service life.
mum service life and economy.
Engine and final drive

Saving fuel
Observe the national speed limits in the country
in which you are travelling.
General
Your vehicle is equipped with comprehensive
Up to 2000 km, approx. 1250 miles
technologies to reduce consumption and emis-
Driving with changing maximum engine speeds sion levels.
and speeds:
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
> With petrol engine, 4500 rpm or 160 km/h, on various factors.
approx. 100 mph
Some measures, for example driving style and
> With diesel engine, 3500 rpm or 150 km/h, regular routine maintenance, can have an influ-
approx. 94 mph ence on fuel consumption and environmental
Avoid full throttle and do not use the automatic impact.
gearbox kick-down.
Remove loaded items that are not
From 2000 km, approx. 1250 miles, required
onwards Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Engine and road speeds can be gradually
increased. Remove attachment parts after use
After use, remove additional mirrors, roof racks
Tyres or rear racks that are not required. Attachment
New tyres do not achieve their full road parts on the vehicle diminish the aerodynamics
grip immediately, for production reasons. and increase fuel consumption.
Drive in a restrained manner for the first
300 km, approx. 200 miles. Close windows and panorama glass
roof*
Brakes An opened panorama glass roof or open win-
Brake pads and discs do not achieve a favoura- dows also increases the drag and thus fuel con-
ble wear and contact pattern until the vehicle sumption.
has covered approx. 500 km or 300 miles.
Regularly check tyre pressure
Clutch Check, and if necessary correct the tyre infla-
The clutch needs to be run in for approx. tion pressure at least twice a month and before
500 km or 300 miles, before it will operate with setting off on a longer journey, see page 193.
108
Insufficient tyre inflation pressure heightens the Switch off the engine during longer
Overview
rolling resistance and thus increases fuel con- stops
sumption and tyre wear. When you stop the vehicle for longer periods,
e.g. at traffic lights, railway crossings or in traffic
Drive off immediately jams, switch off the engine.
Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle at a You will save fuel even if the engine is only off
standstill; it is preferable to set off straight away, for approx. 4 seconds.
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Controls
The automatic start/stop function* switches
This is the quickest way for the cold engine to the engine off automatically during a stop. For
reach its operating temperature. more information on the automatic start/stop
function, refer to page 52.
Use an anticipatory driving style
Driving hints
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking Switch off functions that are not
operations. absolutely necessary at the moment
You should also maintain an appropriate gap Functions such as seat or rear window heating
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front. require a considerable amount of energy and
An anticipatory and even driving style reduces additionally consume fuel, especially in inner-
fuel consumption. city traffic and stop & go traffic situations.
For this reason, switch these functions off if
Navigation
Avoid high engine speeds they are not really required.
Only use 1st gear for driving off. As of 2nd gear,
accelerate quickly. In doing so, avoid high Have routine maintenance work carried
engine speeds and upshift at an early stage. out
When you reach the desired speed, shift to the Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
optimal economy and service life. Have routine
Entertainment
highest possible gear and drive at low engine
speed and constant speed, if possible. maintenance work carried out by your Service.
As a general principle, the following applies: Please also observe the BMW maintenance
driving at lower engine speed lowers fuel con- system, see page 202.
sumption and reduces wear.
The gearshift point display* indicates the gear
General driving notes
Communication
with the most favourable fuel consumption, see
page 64.
Closing the tailgate
Use the coasting mode Drive only with the tailgate closed; other-
wise exhaust gases could enter the pas-
On approaching a red traffic light, take your foot
senger compartment.<
of the accelerator and allow the vehicle roll to a
stop. If you must drive with an open tailgate:
On downhill gradients, take your foot off the 1. Close all windows and the panorama glass
accelerator and allow the vehicle to roll. roof*.
Mobility
In the coasting mode, the flow of fuel is cut off. 2. Increase the air volume from the automatic
air-conditioning system considerably, see
page 92.
Reference
109
Hot exhaust system vehicle cannot be steered or the brake properly
Driving precautions
High temperatures develop in the exhaust applied.

system. Reduce speed on wet or muddy roads to
Do not remove the heat shields or apply under- avoid aquaplaning.<
seal to them. Make sure that when the vehicle is
driven or parked and when the engine is idling, Driving through water
no easily flammable material such as hay, Only drive through calm waters and only up to a
leaves, grass etc. comes into contact with the maximum water depth of 30 cm, approximately
hot exhaust pipe. It could ignite and cause a fire, 12 inch. In this depth do not exceed walking
with the risk of severe injuries or damage. speed of up to 10 km/h, approx. 6 mph.
Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes; otherwise
Do not exceed water depth and walking
there is a risk of burns.<
speed, otherwise damage to the engine,
electronics system and gearbox could occur.<
Diesel particle filter*
The diesel particle filter collects soot particles Apply the handbrake on uphill
and burns them periodically at high tempera- gradients
tures.
Never try to prevent the vehicle from roll-
During the cleaning period which takes a few ing back on an uphill gradient by slipping
minutes: the clutch for a longer period; always apply the
> The engine will temporarily not run as handbrake. The clutch will otherwise wear rap-
smoothly. idly.<
> A slightly higher engine speed is necessary In vehicles with 6-cylinder engines, the drive-off
for normal performance. assistant offers additional help, see page 80.
> Noises and a slight amount of smoke may
emerge from the exhaust until shortly after Safe braking
the engine is switched off. Your vehicle is equipped with ABS as standard.
Applying the brakes fully is the most effective
For Australia/New Zealand: radio way of braking in situations in which this is nec-
signals essary.
The vehicle's performance may be The vehicle can still be steered. To manoeuvre
affected by interference from high fre- around possible obstructions, try to steer as
quency radio signals. Such signals are emitted steady as possible.
by certain transmitting devices, for example,
A pulsating brake pedal and noises from the
aircraft navigation beacons or mobile telephone
hydraulic control unit indicate that ABS is in
relay stations.
operation.
We recommend you consult your Authorised
BMW Dealer should you experience any diffi-
culties.<
Wet roads
In wet conditions, brake slightly and at regular
Aquaplaning intervals after a few kilometres.
A water front may develop between the tyres Make sure not to obstruct other road users
and the road surface on wet or muddy roads. when doing so.
This situation, known as aquaplaning, means The resulting heat dries the brake discs and
that the tyre can actually lose contact with the pads.
road surface completely or partially, so that the The braking force will then be available immedi-
ately if needed.
110
Downhill gradients ing components – Towbars and towing brack-
Overview
On long or steep downhill gradients, drive in the ets' includes the following statement which
gear that requires the least amount of braking. BMW Group Australia herewith adopts: "FOR
Otherwise the brake system can overheat and TRAILER TOWING ONLY". The towbar sup-
the braking effect will be reduced. plied with your BMW vehicle should only be
used for towing purposes, the towbar assembly
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
should not be used in conjunction with any tow-
shifting down through the gears all the way to
bar-mounted carrying device, such as, for
Controls
first gear, if necessary. Downshifting in manual
example, a bicycle carrying rack.
mode of the automatic gearbox, see page 55.
As all BMW Group towbar assemblies are
Avoid unnecessary strain on the brakes.
designed, tested and approved as a single unit,
Otherwise even slight, continuous pres-
the practice of modifying or replacing the BMW
sure on the brake pedal could cause overheat-
supplied towball mount assembly is not
Driving hints
ing, brake pad wear or even brake system fail-
approved. Use only the genuine BMW towball
ure.<
mount assembly.
never drive with the clutch held down,
BMW Group Australia does not recommend or
with the gearbox in neutral or with the
support the installation and use of a Weight Dis-
engine switched off; engine braking action will
tribution Hitch or Load Levelling on any BMW
not be present, or there will be no power assist-
Group vehicle. The use of such devices may
ance to the brakes or steering.<
affect the vehicle's warranty status.
Navigation
Make sure that pedal functions are not
impaired by floor mats, carpets or other
objects.< Rule of the road
Corrosion on the brake disc When entering countries where the traffic
drives on the opposite side of the road to the
Corrosion of the brake disc and soiling of the
Entertainment
country in which your vehicle is registered, cer-
brake pads is caused by:
tain measures are necessary to avoid dazzling
> Low mileage the drivers of oncoming vehicles.
> Long downtimes Your Service will provide you with headlight
> Low strain converters. Note the instructions enclosed with
The minimum stress required for self-cleaning the film when applying.
Communication
is not achieved. If headlight converters have been applied, turn
When the brakes are applied, corroded discs the light switch into position 5 to switch on the
tend to cause juddering, which usually cannot low-beam headlights, see page 86.
be rectified.
Condensation in a parked vehicle Load

Moisture condensate forms in the automatic Do not overload the vehicle in order not to
air-conditioning system and is discharged exceed the permissible load bearing
underneath the vehicle. capacity of the tyres. The tyres could then over-
Mobility
Traces of water on the ground are therefore heat and sustain internal damage. Under certain
normal. circumstances this can cause sudden tyre
pressure loss.<
For Australia/New Zealand: towing Make sure that no fluids are leaking in the
The Australian/New Zealand Standards luggage area. Otherwise the vehicle could
Reference
AS 4177.1-2004 'Caravan and light trailer tow- be damaged.<
111
Loading lashing eyes on the back wall of the luggage
Driving precautions
> Heavy loads: position heavy objects as low compartment, arrows 2.

and as far forward as possible, ideally Always stow and secure the load as
directly behind the respective seat backs. described above, so that it cannot endan-
> Very heavy loads: put the outside seat belts ger the vehicle's occupants, for example if sud-
in the opposite buckle respectively if the den braking or an avoidance manoeuvre is nec-
back seat is empty. essary.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
> Wrap protective material round sharp cor-
loosely inside the vehicle, since they could be
ners and edges.
dislodged, for example by heavy braking, a sud-
den avoidance manoeuvre or similar, and
endanger the occupants.
Do not exceed the vehicle's permitted gross
weight or the axle load limits, see page 225,
otherwise the vehicle's operating safety may be
endangered and the construction and use reg-
ulations infringed.
Use only the lashing eyes that are illustrated to
secure lashing straps. Do not secure any
objects with the upper attachment points for
> Use the partition net to protect passengers, ISOFIX, see page 47, as otherwise these could
see page 102. Make sure that objects can- be damaged.<
not poke through the partition net.
> Do not stack items higher than the top edge
of the seat backs. Roof rack*
> Wrap appropriate protective material
around objects that could strike the rear Roof rack system available as an
window while the vehicle is on the move. optional accessory
A special roof rack system is available as an
Securing the load optional accessory.
Please observe the directions contained in the
installation instructions.
Mounting points
Mounting points are situated on the roof rails*.
Installation
Make sure that there is enough clearance for
lifting and opening the panorama glass roof*.
> Smaller and lighter items: secure with ten-
sioning straps, a luggage compartment Load
net* or other suitable straps* .
A loaded roof rack alters the vehicle's road
> Large and heavy items: secure with load- behaviour and steering response, by moving its
securing equipment*. centre of gravity.
> Load-securing equipment can be fastened For this reason, please observe the following
to two lashing eyes on the side wall of the when loading and driving:
luggage compartment, arrows 1 and two
112
> Do not exceed the permissible roof/axle engine cooling system, depending on the
Overview
load and the permissible gross vehicle model.
weight, see page 225.
> Spread the roof load evenly. Before a journey
> Roof load area may not be too large.
Nose weight
> Place heavy items at the bottom.
> Minimum towbar load: 25 kg or 55 lbs
> Secure the roof rack correctly and safely.
Controls
> Maximum towbar load: 80 kg or 177 lbs
> No not place any items in the movement
If possible, exploit these values.
range of the tailgate.
The weight of the trailer tow hitch and the nose
> Drive smoothly and avoid violent accelera-
weight reduce the maximum payload. The nose
tion, braking or cornering.
weight increases the vehicle weight.
Driving hints
Permissible gross vehicle weight of the pulling
vehicle, which can be found in the technical
Rear luggage rack*
documentation, must not be exceeded by this.
A special rear luggage rack is available as an
optional accessory. A trailer tow hitch is not Load
required for this purpose. Stow the load as low as possible and near the
Please observe the directions contained in the axle.
Navigation
installation instructions. A low centre of trailer gravity makes the outfit
much more stable and safe to drive.
Mounting points
The permissible gross vehicle weight of the
trailer and the permissible axle load of the vehi-
cle must not be exceeded, see technical data.
Entertainment
The respective smaller value is the limit which
should be adhered to.
Tyre pressure
Please observe the tyre inflation pressure of the
vehicle and the trailer.
Communication
The tyre inflation pressure for higher loads must
The securing points are located under the cov- be applied, see page 193.
ers in the bumper. Removing the covers, see
With trailers, the instructions of the trailer man-
page 219.
ufacturer should be adhered to.
Run Flat Indicator

Trailer towing*
Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator after correct-
ing the tyre pressure and attaching/detaching
General
the trailer, see page 80.
Mobility
The permissible trailer load is stated in the

technical documentation.
Outside mirrors
Your Service will inform you of possibilities to Two outside mirrors that bring both rear cor-
improve it. ners of the trailer into your field of view are
The vehicle is equipped with an enforced rear required by law. These types of mirrors are
Reference
axle suspension and with a more powerful available as an optional accessory from Service.
113
Electrical consumers Trailer Stability Control*
Driving precautions
The power output of the trailer's rear lights

must not exceed the following values: The principle
> Flashing turn indicators: 42 W on each side The system helps you to counter the trailer's
tendency to swing from side to side.
> Rear lights: 60 W on each side
It detects snaking movements and promptly
> Brake lights: 84 W total
brakes the vehicle so that road speeds fall to
> Rear fog lights: 42 W total below the critical range and the outfit is stabi-
> Reversing lights: 42 W total lised.
Only keep the energy consumers on for a short If the power socket for the trailer is in use but no
time when towing a caravan, so as to preserve trailer is attached, for example during use of a
the vehicle battery. bicycle carrier with lights, the system may
Check the rear lights of the trailer before become active in extreme driving situations.
setting off, otherwise there is a risk of
endangering other road users.< Operating requirements
The system functions whenever a trailer is
Towing a trailer towed and connected to the corresponding
Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h, power socket, at road speeds of approx.
approx. 50 mph, otherwise the trailer may 65 km/h, approx. 40 mph and above.
start to snake, depending on design and load.<
System limitations
Counteracting snaking > The system cannot intervene if the trailer
If the trailer begins to snake, the outfit can only veers instantly, e.g. on slippery or loose
be stabilised by braking hard immediately. road surfaces.
It is essential to carry out necessary steering > Trailers with a high centre of gravity can tip
corrections as carefully as possible and with over before any snaking motion is detected.
regard for other road users. > The system is not operational if DSC is
deactivated or fails, see page 78.
Gradients
In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up
other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients Trailer tow hitch with
steeper than 12Ξ when towing a trailer. removable ball head*
If higher axle loads have been approved retro-
spectively, the limit is 8Ξ. General
Take care of the removable ball head according
Downhill gradients to the operating manual of the manufacturer to
The outfit tends to snake more easily on down- ensure smooth assembly or disassembly.
hill gradients.
Storage
Shift into the next lower gear before the down-
hill gradient and drive down slowly. The removable ball head is stored in the lug-
gage compartment under the floor panel and
the storage compartment.
Mounting and dismounting

Procedure for mounting and dismounting the
removable ball head is described in the
114
enclosed operating manual of the manufac- > If the drive wheels slip on one side, depress
Overview
turer. the accelerator so that the driving stability
control systems can distribute drive force to
the individual wheels.
Driving on poor road surfaces Please observe the following after driving on
poor road surfaces to ensure the road safety of
The vehicle is in its element on all kinds of road
the vehicle:
surfaces. It combines all-wheel drive* with the
Controls
advantages of a normal vehicles. > Remove dirt from the vehicle.
Do not drive on loose ground otherwise > Remove mud, snow, ice etc. from the vehi-
the vehicle could be damaged.< cle and check tyres for damage.
To ensure your own safety, the safety of pas-
sengers and of the vehicle please observe the
Driving hints
following when driving on poor road surfaces:
> Familiarise yourself with the vehicle before
setting off and do not take any risk.
> Adapt your speed to the road conditions.
Drive slower the steeper and more uneven
the road surface gets.
> Make sure that engine oil and coolant level
Navigation
are near the MAX mark before driving on
very steep downhill or uphill gradients, see
page 197.
> Use Hill Descent Control HDC* on very
steep downhill gradients, see page 79.
Entertainment
> While driving, watch out for obstructions
like, e.g. boulders and potholes and try to
avoid these if possible.
> Avoid the body coming into contact with the
road surface, e.g. on bumpy roads or hill-
tops. The vehicle has a maximum ground
clearance of approx. 20 cm or 7.9 in. Please Communication
note that ground clearance depends on the
load and the driving conditions of the vehi-
cle.
> Only drive through water on roads that is a
maximum of 30 cm or 11.8 in deep and do
not stop. Do not exceed walking speed.
> After driving through water at low speed,
gently operate the brake a few times so that
Mobility
the brake can dry and a reduction of braking

effect due to moisture is prevented.
> Depending on the road condition it may be
advisable to briefly activate DTC, see
Dynamic Traction Control DTC on page 78.
Reference
115
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can enter
destinations and choose your route, so that
your navigation system guides you reliably to
your destination.

Navigation system*
Navigation system
General Professional navigation system:

The navigation system can determine the pre- Updating navigation data
cise position of the vehicle by means of satel-
lites and guide you reliably to any specified des- Inserting navigation DVD
tination. 1. Insert the navigation DVD in the DVD player
Only enter data when the vehicle is stand- with the labelled side upwards.
ing still, and always obey the actual traffic 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
regulations and road signs in the event of any play.
contradiction between the traffic situation and 3. Enter the enable code of the navigation
the instructions given by the navigation system. DVD and, if necessary, change the DVD.
Failure to do so may result in a violation of traffic
laws and put the vehicle's occupants and other Removing navigation DVD
road users at risk.<
Navigation data
General
Navigation data are saved in the vehicle and can
be updated.
Your BMW Service can provide you with naviga-
tion data and enable code.
1. Press button 1.
Updating the data can take several hours The DVD is ejected part way out of the
depending on the data volume. drive.
> Data is updated when the vehicle is in 2. Remove the DVD.
motion.
> The update will automatically continue after Business navigation system:
a break in the journey. Updating navigation data
> Basic navigation functions are available 1. Insert USB device with navigation data into
while the vehicle is in motion. the USB interface in the glove box.
> Data is saved in the vehicle. 2. Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
> The system restarts after the update. play.
> The medium with navigation data can be 3. Enter the enable code of the USB device
removed after updating. with the navigation data.
Fetching information on navigation

data
1. "Navigation"
2. Call up "Options".
3. "Navigation system version":
Information regarding the version of the
data is displayed.
118
Destination input
Overview
You can choose from the following options for 3. "Destination input"
entering a destination:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Selecting a destination from the address
Controls
book, see page 121
> Last destinations, see page 122
> Points of interest, see page 122
> Entering a destination via map, see
Driving hints
page 124
> Selecting home address, see page 122
In addition, the system supports you with the
> Entering a destination via voice com- following special features:
mands*, see page 125
> If you do not enter a street name, you will be
> Destination input with BMW Assist*, see guided to the centre of the town or city.
page 123
> You can skip input of the country, town or
You can also store a navigation destination on city if you wish to retain previous inputs.
Navigation
the favourites buttons, see page 19.
Only enter data when the vehicle is stand- Entering a country
ing still, and always obey the actual traffic 1. "Navigation"
regulations and road signs in the event of any
2. "Destination input"
contradiction between the traffic situation and
Entertainment
the instructions given by the navigation system. 3. Select "Country" or the country displayed.
Otherwise, you risk endangering the safety of
the passengers in your vehicle and other road Entering a town/city
users.< 1. Select "City" or town/city displayed.
Entering a destination
manually Communication
The wordmatch principle, see page 128, makes

the input of place-names and streets easier.
This makes it possible to enter different spell-
ings, and names are completed automatically
so that stored place-names and streets can be
called up quickly. 2. Select letters, if applicable.
1. Press the MENU button. To delete letters:
Mobility
2. "Navigation" > To delete individual letters:

Turn the controller until is high-
> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller until is high-
Reference
119
lighted and press the controller for Entering a road/street without a
Destination input
longer than usual. destination town/city

To enter spaces: You can also enter a street without entering a
> Select the symbol. town or city. In this case, all streets in the
entered country are offered. The respective
The list is gradually narrowed down with
town or city is shown after the street name.
every subsequent letter that you enter.
If a town or city has been entered already, this
3. Jog the controller to the right.
entry can be cancelled. This may be useful in
4. Select a town/city name from the list. instances where the desired street cannot be
If there are several places with the same name: found in the entered town or city because it
1. Move to the list of place names. belongs to a different district, for example.
2. Highlight town/city. 1. "Navigation"

For Professional navigation system: 2. "Destination input"
A preview is displayed. 3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
3. Select the town/city. 4. Move to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with country currently displayed.
Entering the postcode
1. Select "City" or the town/city displayed.
3. Select digits.
4. Move to the list of postal codes and towns/
cities.
5. Highlight the postal code.
For Professional navigation system:
A preview is displayed.
6. Select the postcode. 6. Select the letters.
7. Move to the list of street names.
Entering a street and junction 8. Highlight the street.
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street. For Professional navigation system:
2. Enter the road/street and junction in the A preview is displayed.
same way as town/city. 9. Select the street.
After entering the street, you can add the junc-
tion or house number. Entering a house number
If there are several streets with the same name: You may enter any house number that is stored
1. Move to the list of street names. in the navigation data for the street in question.
2. Highlight the street. 1. "Building number"

For Professional navigation system: 2. Select digits.
A preview is displayed. 3. Move to the list of house numbers.
3. Select the street. 4. Select the house number or a range of
house numbers.
120
Starting route guidance after 1. Call up "Options".
Overview
destination input 2. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing
1. "Accept destination" contact".
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
> Set "Route criteria", see page 129.
> Search for "Points of interest at loc.", see
page 122.
Controls
Address book
Creating contacts, see page 178.
Driving hints
3. If applicable, select an existing contact.
Selecting a destination from the
address book 4. Select "Work address" or "Home address".
1. "Navigation" 5. Enter "Surname" and "First name", if appli-
cable.
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if 6. "Save in car"
these addresses were checked as destina-
Memorising position
Navigation
tions.
If contacts with addresses from the mobile The current position can be stored in the
phone or the BMW Online address book* address book.
are not displayed, these must first be 1. "Navigation"
checked as destinations, see page 179.
Entertainment
3. "Save position as a contact" or "Add posi-
tion to contact".
Communication
3. Select a contact from the list or use "A-Z

search".
4. If applicable, select "Work address" or
4. Depending on the selection, either select an
"Home address".
existing contact from the list or select the
type of address and enter the surname and
Storing a destination in the address first name.
Mobility
book
5. "Save in car"
After destination input, save the destination in
the address book.
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Reference
121
3. Highlight the entry. Editing a destination
Destination input
4. Call up "Options". Destinations can be edited, e.g. to change the

5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry". house number in an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
Accepting home address as 2. "Last destinations"
destination
3. Highlight the destination.
The home address must be created as destina-
tion. See 'Defining a contact as home address',
page 178. 5. "Edit destination"
1. "Navigation"
Deleting last destinations
2. "Address book"
1. "Navigation"
3. "Home address"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Points of interest
You can search for points of interest, e.g. hotels
4. "Start guidance" and sights, and start route guidance to this
location.
The scope of information and symbols
Last destinations depends on the respective navigation
data.<
The last destinations reached are stored auto-
matically. These destinations can be called up
and incorporated into route guidance. Calling up the search for points of
interest
Calling up last destinations 1. "Navigation"
1. "Navigation" 2. "Points of interest"
The search can be defined according to the
2. "Last destinations"
location and type of the point of interest.
Location of the points of interest

Search for a point of interest according to the
location for a town/city or the route.
3. Select destination.
4. "Start guidance"
122
1. "Search location" tance, with an arrow pointing in the
Overview
direction of the destination.
> "At destination", "At another place",
"Along the route"
Points of interest are sorted by their dis-
tance to the search location.
> Destinations in the selected category
Controls
are displayed as symbols in the map
view. The display depends on the map
scale and the category.
2. Select search location of point of interest: 3. Highlight a point of interest.
> "At current location"
Driving hints
The destination is displayed in the preview
> "At destination" map.
> "At another place" 4. Select a point of interest.
> "Along the route" 5. Select the symbol.
Category of the points of interest
If a phone number has been stored, a tele-
1. "Category"
phone connection can be established.
Navigation
2. Select "All" or special category, e.g. hotels
or restaurants. Additional information via BMW
Online*
Category details 1. "Navigation"
Additional details can be displayed for some
2. "Points of interest"
Entertainment
point of interest in the navigation data, e.g. res-
taurant type, Italian. 3. Select a point of interest.
"Category details" 4. Call up "Options".
5. "Further info (BMW Online)"
Destination input using BMW Assist*
Communication
A connection to BMW information service is
established, see page 181.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Destination input"
4. "BMW Assist dest. input"
Starting the search for points of
interest Entering points of interest by name
Mobility
1. "Start search" 1. "Navigation"

2. The list of points of interest is displayed. 2. "Points of interest"
> "At current location" 3. "Name, A-Z search"
Points of interest are displayed by dis- 4. Enter letters.
Depending on the distance, the search can
Reference
123
take some time. A maximum of 100 entries Entering a destination via
Destination input
can be displayed in the list.

map
5. Move to the list of points of interest.
If you know only where a destination or road is
6. Highlight a point of interest.
located, you can use the map to enter the des-
tination.
The destination is displayed in the preview
map.
Calling up the map
7. Select a point of interest.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
A map section is displayed on the Control Dis-
play. The map shows the current position of the
Entering points of interest via Online vehicle.
search*
1. "Navigation" Selecting a destination
2. "Points of interest" 1. Select the symbol. "Interactive map" is
3. "Online search" started.
4. Select a point of interest.
Displaying points of interest in the map

To show symbols for the points of interest in the
map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map" 2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
3. Call up "Options". > Change scale: turn the controller.
4. "Display points of interest" > Move map: jog controller in the respec-
tive direction.
> Move map diagonally: jog controller in
the respective direction and press con-
troller.
3. Press controller to display more menu
items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance"
or "Add as another dest.".
> "Resume": back to map view.
5. Select the settings.
> "Search for points of int.": search for
point of interest is started.
124
Specifying the street/road Say input
Overview
If the system does not find a street, a street > Countries, towns/cities, streets and junc-
name near the destination or its coordinates are tions can be spoken or spelt as whole words
displayed. in the system language, see page 72.
Example: to enter a town/city within Ger-
Interactive map many as a whole word, the language of the
In the interactive map, the scale can be set and system must be German.
Controls
the map section shifted. Other functions are > Town/city, street and house number can
available by pressing the controller: also be spoken in one sentence.*
> Spell the input if language area and system
language differ.
> Say letters fluently and avoid unnecessary
Driving hints
intonation and breaks.
Enter address*
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
2. {Destination input}
> Select the symbol and "Start guid- 3. Wait for system request.
Navigation
ance", if applicable. 4. Say town/city, street and house number in
> "Exit interactive map" one sentence.
> Map view 5. Proceed with input as requested by the sys-

tem.
> "Display destination"
Map section around the destination is 6. If required, say the parts of the address indi-
Entertainment
displayed. vidually, e.g. town/city.
> "Display current location"

Entering a town/city
Map section around the current location
is displayed. The town/city can be spelt or entered as a
whole word*.
> "Search for points of int.", see page 122.
The input options depend on the naviga-
Communication
tion data and the country and language
settings in each case.<
Entering a destination via
1. {City} or {Spell name of city}.
voice commands*
2. Wait for system request of town/city.
General 3. Say the name of the town/city or, if applica-
You can enter a desired destination via the ble, the first three letters of the town/city at
voice control system. During destination entry, minimum.
it is possible at any time to switch between
voice commands and entries via iDrive; to do so,
Mobility
reactivate the voice control if necessary.

With {Voice commands} you can have the
possible commands read aloud.<
Reference
125
Up to 20 towns/cities are displayed, Planning a journey
Destination input
depending on the input.

4. Select a town or city: New trip
> Select one of the displayed towns/ Various intermediate destinations can be
cities: {Yes} entered for a trip.
> To select other town/city: {New 1. "Navigation"
entry} 2. "Map"
> Select entry, e.g. {Entry 2} 3. Jog controller to the left, if applicable.
> Spell entry: {Spell name of city} 4. Select the symbol.
Similar sounding towns/cities that the 5. "Enter new destination"
system cannot distinguish are grouped
6. Select the type of destination input and
together in a separate list and displayed as one
enter the intermediate destination.
town/city with the three following points.
If applicable, select this entry using {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city in that list.<
The town or city can also be selected from the
list via iDrive: turn controller until you have
selected the town/city and press controller.
Enter street or junction

Streets or junctions are entered analogue to the
town/place.
7. Enter an intermediate destination.
Entering a house number 8. "Start guidance"
You can enter house number up to 999:
1. {Building number} Entering an intermediate destination
2. Say the house number. A maximum of 30 intermediate destination can
be entered.
3. {Yes} to confirm house number.
1. "Enter new destination"
4. "Accept destination"
2. Select the type of destination input and
Starting route guidance enter the intermediate destination.
{Start guidance}
Route guidance is started immediately.
Add additional intermediate

destination
{Add as another destination}
Additional intermediate destinations can be
added.
3. Select "Add as another dest.".
Storing a destination
4. Select where to insert the intermediate des-
Destination is automatically transferred to the tination.
list of last destinations.
126
Starting the trip Deleting an intermediate destination
Overview
After entering all intermediate destinations: 1. "Map"
"Start guidance" 2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all stage dest."
Saving a trip 4. Select intermediate destination.
Up to 30 saved trips can be saved in the trip list. 5. "Delete stage destination"
Controls
2. "Save journey" Deleting a trip
3. Enter letters. 1. "Navigation"
4. "OK" 2. "Saved journeys"
Driving hints
The trip is stored in the trip list under the name 3. Select desired trip.
that is entered.
For Professional navigation system: 5. "Delete all journeys" or "Delete journey".
Start saved trip
1. "Navigation"
Importing trips using a USB medium
2. "Saved journeys"
Navigation
3. Select desired trip.
2. Insert a USB medium in the USB interface in
4. "Start guidance" the glove box.
3. "Navigation"
Changing trips
4. "Saved journeys"
These functions are not available in the case of
Entertainment
imported trips or Guided Tours. 5. "Import journeys"
6. "USB"
Reversing the direction of a trip 7. "OK"
Intermediate destinations can be displayed in
reverse sequence after route guidance has For Professional navigation system:
been started. Importing trips using BMW Online
Communication
1. "Map" 1. "Navigation"
2. "Guidance" 2. "Saved journeys"
3. Call up "Options". 3. "Import journeys"
4. "Reverse stage dest. order" 4. "BMW Online"
Reclassify intermediate destination

1. "Map" For Professional navigation
2. "Guidance" system:
Mobility
3. "Display all stage dest." Guided tours

4. Select intermediate destination.
General
5. "Reposition stage dest."
You can adopt recommended routes into the
route guidance, e.g. holiday route.
Reference
127
Starting guided tours > When entering place-names or streets, the
Destination input
1. "Navigation" system completes the name automatically

as soon as it has been identified beyond
2. "Saved journeys"
doubt.
3. "Guided Tour search"
> The system offers only those letters for
selection and entry that occur in names
stored in the vehicle. This makes it impossi-
ble to enter incorrect names or unknown
addresses.
4. Select "Country" and "Region" or search

criteria:
> "Search for name"
> "Search for nearest Tour"
5. If applicable "Start search"
6. Select guided tour.
8. "Start guidance"
Quit guided tours

1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
4. "Stop guidance"
Wordmatch principle
The wordmatch principle makes the input of
place-names and streets easier. It compares
your destination inputs continuously with the
data stored in the vehicle, and reacts immedi-
ately. This has the following advantages for you:
> You can input place-names in a form that
may differ from the official version, provided
that the alternative entry is familiar in
another country or language.
Example:
Instead of the English version "Munich" you
can input the German name "München" or
the Italian version "Monaco".
128
Route guidance
Overview
Starting route guidance The settings are saved for the remote control
currently in use.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Destination input" Route criteria cannot be changed for guided
Controls
3. Select destination. tours.
4. "Accept destination"
Altering route criteria
5. "Start guidance"
1. "Navigation"
The route will be displayed on the Control Dis-
2. "Map"
Driving hints
play after it has been calculated.
The distance to the destination/intermediate 3. "Route criteria"
destination and the estimated time of arrival are 4. Select a criterion:
shown in the map view. > "Fast route": time-optimised route;
combination of shortest possible dis-
tance and fast roads
Exiting route guidance > "Efficient route": optimised combination
Navigation
1. "Navigation" of fastest and shortest route
2. "Map" > "Short route": shortest distance without
taking time into account
> "Alternative routes": suggestions of
4. "Stop guidance"
additional alternative routes during route
Entertainment
guidance
Continuing route guidance

Route guidance may be continued if you did not
reach your destination during the last trip.
"Resume guidance"
Communication
Route criteria
General
You can influence the route calculated by
selecting various route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like during des-
tination input or during route guidance.
Mobility
The route is planned according to fixed rules.

The type of road is also taken into account, e.g.
motorways or winding roads. For this reason,
the route proposed by the system will not nec-
essarily be the one the driver expects from
experience.
Reference
129
5. If necessary, select supplementary route Displaying list of roads or towns/cities
Route guidance
criteria. Where possible, these selected cri- along the route

teria are avoided on the route. With the route guidance started, a list of streets
> Avoid motorways, if possible: and towns/cities on the route is displayed. For
"Avoid motorways" each route stage, the distance to be driven and
> Avoid toll roads, if possible: the traffic information are displayed.
"Avoid toll roads" 1. "Navigation"
> Avoid roads where toll vignettes are 2. "Route profile"
required, if possible: 3. Highlight the route stage.
"Avoid pre-paid roads"
> Avoid ferries, if possible: The route stage is displayed in the preview
"Avoid ferries" map.
The setting applies to the current route and the
planning of other routes. Avoiding sections of a route
During route guidance, you can also instruct the
Dynamic route guidance navigation system to detour around sections of
"Dynamic guidance" is switched on: the route. You do this by specifying after how
The route is automatically changed if a traffic many kilometres of the original route you wish
obstruction is encountered. The system does to return to it.
not alert you to traffic obstructions on the origi- 1. "Navigation"
nal route.
2. "Route profile"
Depending on the type of road and the nature
3. "New route for:"
and length of the traffic congestion, the route
can also be calculated in such a way that it cuts
across the traffic congestion.
Activating dynamic route guidance

1. "Navigation"
3. "Dynamic guidance"
If route criteria "Avoid motorways",
"Avoid toll roads", "Avoid pre-paid roads"
4. Turn the controller: enter desired number of
or "Avoid ferries" are selected, calculation of
kilometres or miles.
the route may take longer.<
Course of route Cancel bypassing

To cease bypassing the section of route:
General 1. "Navigation"
Depending on the equipment version, various 2. "Route profile"
modes are available for displaying the course of
3. "Cancel new route"
the route during route guidance:
> List of streets and towns/cities Refuelling recommendation
> Map view, see page 131 The remaining range is calculated and service
stations along the route are recommended.
130
1. "Navigation" 1. If necessary, have the last voice message
Overview
2. "Route profile" repeated.
3. "Recommended refuel" 2. Turn the knob during the voice message

A list of service stations is displayed. until the desired volume is obtained.
4. Select a service station.

Controls
Route guidance by voice
messages
Driving hints
Switching voice messaging on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on/off dur- rently in use.
ing route guidance.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map" Map view
Navigation
Displaying map view
Symbol Meaning You can have your current position shown on a
map. After starting route guidance, the planned
Voice information switched on
route is shown on the map.
Voice information switched off 1. "Navigation"
Entertainment
For rapid access, it is a good idea to save items 2. "Map"
on a favourite button, see page 19. The following functions are available directly in
the map view:
Repeating spoken instruction
1. "Navigation" Symbol Function
2. "Map" Start/end route guidance

3. Highlight the symbol. Switching voice messaging Communication
4. Press controller twice. on/off
Changing route criteria or
Adjusting the volume of the voice selecting a route alternative
instructions* Points of interest
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
Displaying traffic information
instruction is being issued.
Interactive map
Mobility
Adjusting map view

Changing the scale
Reference
131
Information in the map view 3. Set optimised map view.
Route guidance
> Time, entertainment source, sound output, > "Day/night mode"

scale, alignment of the map Select by lighting conditions and make
> Distance to destination/intermediate desti- settings. This setting is ignored if "Traf-
nation, estimated time of arrival, if route fic situation/grey map" is active.
guidance is active. > For Professional navigation system:
> If there are traffic obstructions, these are "Satellite images"
highlighted in colour. Satellite images* are displayed in scales
from 2 km to 1000 km, depending on
To show/hide information on the map:
availability and resolution.
Press controller.
> For Professional navigation system:
View of the map "Perspective view in 3D"
Shows a three-dimensional image. Dis-
tinctive locations available in the naviga-
2. Select a setting: tion data are displayed on the map three
> "North-oriented" dimensionally.
> "Indicating dir. of travel" > "Traffic situation/grey map"
> "Perspective" Map is optimised to display traffic infor-
mation. Symbols for points of interest
> "Arrow view" are no longer displayed.
For Business navigation system:
Change map selection Arrow view
Select "Interactive map". An arrow view is displayed on the map of the
> Move map: jog controller in the respective Control Display.
direction. 1. Call up "Options".
> Move map diagonally: jog controller in the 2. "Arrow view on map"
respective direction and press controller.
Changing the scale Map view for split screen
1. Select the symbol. The map view can be selected regardless of the
2. Turn the controller to change the scale. main screen for split screen mode.
Automatically set scale 2. "Split screen"
In the north-facing map view, turn the controller Split screen is switched on.
any direction until the scale indicator shows 3. Jog the controller repeatedly to the right
'AUTO'. until the split screen content is selected.
The map scale is selected in such a way that the
current position and destination are shown on 4. Select map view:
the map. > "Arrow view"
> "Map north-oriented"
Settings for map view > "Map indicating dir. of travel"
Map is displayed on the Control Display.
> "Map perspective"
> "3D exit roads"
2. "Settings"
132
Changing the scale 3. To exit the menu:
Overview
1. Jog the controller to the right until the split Jog the controller to the left.
screen is selected.
Traffic information in the map
2. Turn the controller.
If the traffic information map is active, the Con-
trol Display is set to grey scales. This enables
an optimum representation of traffic informa-
Traffic information*
tion. Day/night mode is not taken into account
Controls
You can obtain a display of traffic information in this setting. Symbols of points of interest are
from radio stations that broadcast a TMC (Traf- no longer displayed.
fic Message Channel). This traffic information is 1. "Navigation"
constantly updated with the aid of measure-
2. "Map"
ments from traffic control centres and indica-
Driving hints
tions from congestion detectors. 3. Call up "Options".
During route guidance, the traffic information 4. "Settings"
applicable to the route appears automatically
5. "Traffic situation/grey map"
and it is taken into account in the route plan-
ning. You can also call up all traffic information
Symbols in the map view
manually via iDrive.
Symbols for traffic congestion are displayed
The traffic information is displayed in the map
depending on the scale of the map and the loca-
Navigation
view.
tion of the congestion in relation to the route.
Switching reception on/off Additional information in the map view

1. "Navigation"
Length, direction and effect of a traffic conges-
2. Call up "Options". tion are displayed with road signs or bars along
Entertainment
3. Activate/deactivate "Receive traffic info". the calculated route, depending on the scale.
The colours depend on the information trans-
Traffic information in a list mitted by the traffic warning services.
The list of traffic information can be displayed > Red: congestion
via the map view or menu. > Orange: stop-and-go traffic
> Yellow: heavy traffic
Communication
Calling up traffic information
> Green: clear road
1. "Navigation"
> Grey: general traffic information, e.g. road-
2. "Map"
works
3. Jog controller to the left, if applicable.
4. Select the symbol: "Traffic information" Filtering traffic information
Traffic information on the planned route is You can filter which traffic information the sys-
displayed first. Traffic information is tem is to display:
arranged in order of distance from the vehi-
1. "Navigation"
cle's current position.
Mobility
2. "Map"
5. Select traffic information.
Additional information can be displayed for
some types of traffic information: 4. "Traffic info categories"

Reference
2. Further information is displayed.
133
5. Select the desired category. "Dynamic guidance" is activated for current
Route guidance
route guidance.
Dynamic route guidance

If you select "Dynamic guidance", the route is
automatically changed in the event of traffic
congestion. The system does not notify on any
traffic congestion on the original route.
The newly calculated route may lead through
the traffic congestion, depending on the road
type and the type and length of the traffic con-
The traffic information of the selected category gestion.
is displayed.
> Traffic information regarding the route itself Country information using BMW
cannot be hidden. Online*
> For your own personal safety, traffic infor- BMW Online can transfer specific information
mation that indicates potential danger, e.g. on countries, see page 183, e.g. speed limits on
oncoming drivers on the wrong side of the A-roads.
road, cannot be hidden. 1. "Navigation"
Traffic information during route
guidance 3. "Country info (BMW Online)"
The system reacts differently, depending on
whether "Dynamic guidance", see page 130,
was selected or not.
Traffic congestion on the way is taken into
account during route guidance.
Particular hazards, e.g. oncoming drivers on the
wrong road side, are displayed irrespective of
the setting.
Display traffic congestion

If traffic congestion is reported to the navigation
system and "Dynamic guidance" has not been
selected, you will receive certain information as
from a distance of approx. 50 km or 30 miles,
e.g. length of the congestion.
The last chance to leave the route is indicated
shortly beforehand.
This information is still displayed if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
Selecting detour
Select the symbol: "Detour".
134
What to do if ...
Overview
What to do if ...
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The vehicle is in an area not covered by the
data, is in a poor-reception area or the sys-
Controls
tem is currently calculating the position.
Reception will normally be possible out-
doors.
> A destination without a street is not trans-
ferred to the route guidance system?
Driving hints
No city centre can be determined for the
place entered. Enter any street in the place
selected and start route guidance.
> A destination is not transferred to the route
guidance system?
The data for the destination are not availa-
ble in the navigation data. Choose a desti-
nation as close as possible to the original
Navigation
one.
> Letters for a destination cannot be selected
for destination input?
Saved data does not contain data of the
destination. Choose a destination as close
Entertainment
as possible to the original one.
> The map view is not displayed in greys-
cales?
If the traffic information map is active, the
Control Display is set to grey scales. This
enables an optimum representation of traf-
Communication
fic information.
> Spoken instructions cease to be given
immediately before junctions during route
guidance?
Area not fully recorded, or you have devi-
ated from the proposed route and the sys-
tem requires a few seconds to calculate a
new route.
Mobility
Reference
135
Entertainment
This chapter tells you how to operate the radio,
CD, TV and external audio devices and how to
adjust the tone settings for these systems.

On/off and settings
On/off and settings
The following audio and video sources share 4 Station/track search

the same controls and adjustment features: > Changing radio stations
> Radio > Selecting a track for the CD/DVD*
> CD/DVD* player player, CD changer* and certain multi-
> CD changer* media devices
> Video*
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player Switching on/off
To switch audio output for entertainment sys-
Controls tems on/off:
Press the button 1 next to the CD/DVD player.
The audio and video sources can be operated
This symbol on the Control Display indicates
via:
that audio output has been switched off.
> Buttons on the CD/DVD*player
Sound output remains available for approx.
> iDrive 20 minutes after the ignition has been switched
> Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10 off.
> Favourites buttons, see page 19 All you have to do is switch audio output back
on.
> Voice control system
Buttons on the CD/DVD* player

Adjusting the volume
Turn knob 1 next to the CD/DVD player until the
desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, see page 10.
Tone settings
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
1 Audio output for entertainment systems on/ and bass or the speed-dependent volume
off, volume increase.
> Press: switch on/off The tone settings are applied to all audio
The track or radio station last set will be sources.
played upon switching it on. The settings are saved for the remote control
> Turn: adjusting the volume currently in use.
2 Eject CD/DVD
Treble, bass, balance, fader
3 Drive for CD/DVD
> "Balance": volume balance, right/left
> "Fader": volume balance, front/rear
138
Adjusting Multichannel playback, surround*
Overview
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings". You can choose between stereo and multichan-
2. "Tone" nel playback, surround sound.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "L7 Surround"
Controls
Driving hints
3. Select the desired tone setting.
When playing an audio track in stereo, mul-

tichannel playback - surround - is simulated.
Surround is automatically activated or deacti-
Navigation
vated depending on the audio track selected.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trademarks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
4. Adjusting: turn the controller.
Entertainment
5. Memorising: press controller. Volumes
> "Speed volume": adaptation of the volume
Equaliser* depending on the speed
You can adjust individual audio frequency > "PDC"*: volume of the PDC sound signal in
ranges. relation to the sound output from the enter-
1. "Radio", "CD/Multimedia" or "Settings". tainment system
Communication
2. "Tone" > "Gong": volume of the sound signal, e.g. for
seatbelt reminder, in relation to the sound
3. "Equaliser"
output from the entertainment system
4. Select the desired setting.
Adjusting
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
Mobility

Reference
6. Memorising: press controller.
139
4. Select the desired volume setting.
On/off and settings

6. Memorising: press controller.
Resetting the tone settings

You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
140
Radio
Overview
Your radio is designed to receive the following The selected radio station is stored for the
stations: remote control currently in use.
> FM: stations in the VHF waveband
Changing stations
> AM: stations in the MW and SW wave-
Controls
bands* Turn and press the controller
> DAB: digitally transmitted stations*, see or

page 145 Press the button for the corresponding
direction
or
Driving hints
Selecting station Press the buttons on the steering wheel, see
page 10.
Selecting stations manually

Selecting a station using the frequency.
1. "Radio"
Navigation
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual search"
4. In the "AM" waveband, choose as applica-
ble between "MW" or "SW"*.
Press the knob if audio output is switched off.
5. Select frequency: turn the controller.
Entertainment
1. "Radio"
Communication
To memorise a station: press and hold the con-

2. "FM" or "AM"
troller.
3. Select the desired station.
Memorising stations
Mobility
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
Reference
141
3. Select the desired station. 4. "RDS"
Radio
4. Press and hold the controller. The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
5. Select the desired memory location. rently in use.
The stations are stored for the remote control

currently in use.
Regional programmes*
Via favourites buttons Certain FM stations broadcast regional pro-
You can also store a station on the favourites grammes at certain times of day. The following
buttons, see page 19. settings are possible:
1. Select the station. > REG function on:
2. ... Press the desired button for Recommended setting. The set regional
longer. programme is retained for as long as possi-
ble. Reception quality may deteriorate
when you go beyond its transmission area.
Radio Data System RDS* With poor reception quality over a longer
period of time, a switch is made to a regional
Additional information is transmitted using RDS programme with better reception.
in the FM wave length. RDS stations therefore
> REG function off:
offer the following features:
When you leave the transmission area for
> Where a radio station is broadcast on sev-
the regional station that is tuned, the radio
eral frequencies, the set automatically
changes over to a new regional station if
switches to whichever frequency offers the
available. When in an area with two or more
best reception.
regional stations, the radio may switch to
> Where reception conditions are good, the and fro between the stations. If this hap-
names of stations are displayed on the Con- pens, switch on the REG function.
trol Display. Where reception is poor or in
the event of interference, it may take some Switching REG function on/off
time before the station names will appear in
1. "Radio"
the display.
2. "FM"
Switching RDS on/off 3. Call up "Options".
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
142
4. "REG" You can also store the TP function on the
Overview
favourites buttons, see page 19.
Interrupt the traffic report

Press the button during the traffic report.
Adjusting the volume for traffic

reports*
Controls
Turn the volume knob during the traffic report
until you have set the desired volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur- This volume is retained for subsequent traffic
rently in use. reports. If other audio or video sources are set
Driving hints
louder than the traffic reports, the volume of a
report is increased correspondingly.
Traffic Programme, TP*
You can receive traffic reports while listening to Memorised stations
a CD. For this, the TP function, Traffic Pro-
gramme, must be switched on. 40 stations can be stored.
The navigation system's voice messages are
Navigation
Calling up a station
not interrupted by traffic reports.
1. "Radio"
Display in the status bar:
2. "Saved stations"
> "TP": Traffic Programme is switched on.
> No display: Traffic Programme is not
Entertainment
switched on.
Memorising stations
Switching the Traffic Programme on/ The currently selected station is stored.
off 1. "Radio"
1. "Radio" 2. "Saved stations"
2. "FM" 3. "Save station"
Communication
4. "TP"
Mobility
4. Select the desired memory location.

The list of stored stations is stored for the
The traffic report station with the strongest remote control currently in use.
reception is chosen. You can also store a station on the favourites
buttons, see page 19.
Reference
143
Deleting a station
Radio
1. "Radio"
2. "Saved stations"
5. "Delete entry"
144
Digital radio DAB*
Overview
Digital radio provides you with additional sta- 3. If applicable, select "All ensembles" or the
tions that are transmitted with a high sound desired ensemble.
quality. A digital radio network must be available
in order to receive digital stations.
Controls
Several stations are combined to form an
ensemble. Up to 15 stations are broadcast
within an ensemble.
Each station can transmit additional information
such as weather reports, for example, or the
Driving hints
name of the artist performing the current music
track.
Some stations feature additional programmes; 4. Select the desired station.
e.g. sports stations can broadcast various
sports events simultaneously. In such cases
you have the option of choosing a particular
sports event.
Navigation
Station scan*
The list of stations that can be received is not
automatically updated without the Professional
Entertainment
navigation system. Press to manually start the
station scan. Changing stations
1. "Radio" Press the button.
2. "DAB"
Changing the ensemble
3. If applicable, select "All ensembles".
You can change the ensemble only if you select
4. "Station search"
Communication
"All ensembles".
Press the button for longer.
Cancel station scan
Call up any stored station with:
> Favourites buttons Memorising stations
> "Saved stations"
1. "Radio"
2. "DAB"
Selecting station
Mobility
1. "Radio"
2. "DAB"
Reference
145
3. Select the desired station. Automatic DAB/FM
Digital radio DAB
switchover*
The station is automatically changed if it is no
longer available and DAB/FM switchover is acti-
vated.
The station is searched for in another ensemble
or the system searched for the analogue fre-
quency.
Automatic switchover is only possible if the
respective station is available in sufficient qual-
4. Press the controller again.
ity and if the identification of the stations
5. Select the desired memory location. matches.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use. Switching on automatic DAB/FM
You can also store a station on the favourites switchover
buttons, see page 19. 1. "Radio"
2. "DAB"
Displaying additional
4. "Autom. DAB/FM changeover"
information
If offered by a particular station, additional infor-
mation can be displayed, such as weather
reports or the name of the artist performing the
current music track.
1. "Radio"
2. "DAB"
This symbol beside the station name indi-
5. "Station information"
cates that the analogue version of a digital sta-
tion is being played.
Symbol next to the name of the station indi-
cates that a digital station in another ensemble
that can be played in digital quality.
rently in use.
Additional programmes
This symbol is shown if a selected station
offers additional programmes. Sports stations,
for example, may broadcast various sports
events at the same time. You then have the
option of choosing a particular sports event.
146
1. "Radio"
Overview
2. "DAB"
5. Select the additional programme.
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
Entertainment
Communication
Mobility
Reference
147
CD/DVD* player and CD changer*
CD/DVD player and CD changer
CD/DVD playback 1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Insert CD/DVD
3. Selecting the desired CD or DVD:
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the label
facing up. The CD/DVD is automatically
retracted.
The CD starts to play automatically if audio out-
put is switched on. When playing CDs/DVDs
with compressed audio files, it can take the CD
player a few minutes to read in the data,
depending on the directory structure.
Formats that can be played

CD/DVD* player Eject CD/DVD
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD- Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, The CD/DVD is partly ejected from the drive.
DVD-Audio (only video system), DVD-
Video Symbol Function
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
CD/DVD player
VCD, SVCD
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC CD changer
CD player/CD changer*
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA Playing audio tracks
Starting play Selecting track with the button
Press the button for the appropriate
Via iDrive
direction repeatedly until the desired track is
Fill and insert the CD/DVD magazine, see reached.
page 152.
To start to play a CD if there is already a CD in
the player or changer:
148
Selecting a track using iDrive 5. Select a track and press the controller.
Overview
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the desired track to start playback.
Controls
Displaying information on the track*
If information is stored for a track, this is dis-
Driving hints
played automatically:
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio

files*
Navigation
Depending on the data, not all characters of the
CD/DVD are displayed correctly.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
> Artist
Entertainment
> Album title
4. Select the directory as appropriate.
> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
To change to a higher-level directory: jog
the controller to the left. > File name of the track
Random playback
The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played in
Communication
random order once.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Mobility
Reference
149
5. "Random" Starting play
For your own safety, video is displayed only up

to a speed of approx. 3 km/h or approx. 2 mph
and in some national market versions it is dis-
played only when the handbrake is applied or
the selector lever is in position P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the 3. Select a DVD with video content.
folders and the tracks they contain are played in 4. "DVD menu"
random order.
Random playback is switched off when the
audio source is changed or the ignition is
switched off.
Fast forward/rewind
Press and hold the button for the appro-
priate direction.
Automatic repeat function*

5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are
repeated automatically.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Video playback* 2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
Country codes
4. "Select track"
Only DVDs with the code of your home region
5. Select the desired track.
can be played, see also the information on your
DVD. The CD/DVD is started.
Code Region Video menu

1 USA, Canada To open the Video menu:
2 Japan, Europe, Near East, 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.
South Africa 2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis-
3 South-East Asia played.
The Video menu is displayed:
4 Australia, Central and
South America, New Zealand
Symbol Function
5 North-West Asia, North Africa
Calls up the DVD menu*
6 China
Starting play
0 All regions
Pause
150
Symbol Function Subtitles*
Overview
Subtitles can be selected if the DVD includes
Stop
this feature.
Next chapter/next track 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.
Previous chapter/previous 2. Call up "Options".
track
3. "Subtitles"
Fast forward
4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis-
Controls
Rewind play subtitles".
With fast forward/rewind: each time the control-

ler is pressed, the speed increases. To stop,
start playback.
Driving hints
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to call up
the Video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD. Brightness, contrast, colour
Navigation
> To select menu items: jog and press the 1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.
controller. 2. Call up "Options".
> To change to the Video menu: turn the con- 3. "Display settings"
troller and select "Back". 4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Colour"
Entertainment
Settings for DVD/VCD
For some DVDs, settings are only possible via
the DVD menu, see also information on your
DVD.
Language*
1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing. Communication
3. "Audio/language" 5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
has been reached, then press the controller.
Zoom
Display video picture over full screen.
1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.
Mobility
3. "Other options"
4. Select the desired language.

Reference
The languages available depend on the DVD.
151
4. "Zoom mode" CD changer*
Selecting a track The BMW CD changer for six CDs is located on

DVD video: the left of the luggage compartment under a
1. With the DVD menu displayed, turn the con- cover in the side trim.
troller.
Taking out the CD magazine
To load or empty it, take the CD magazine out of
3. "Other options"
the CD changer:
4. "Select title"
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
Camera angles*
The camera angles depend on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller while the DVD is playing.
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
3. "Other options" The CD magazine is ejected.
4. "Viewing angle" Wait at least 2 seconds before pushing the
5. Select the desired angle of view. magazine back in so that the machine can read
in the inserted CDs again.
Calling up the main menu, Back
These functions are not included on every DVD.
It might be that these functions cannot be run.
152
Loading/emptying the CD magazine bly.
Overview
Use only round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 12 cm, and do not use CDs/DVDs in
conjunction with adapters, e.g. CD singles, oth-
erwise the CDs or the adapter could jam and be
impossible to eject.
Do not use combined CD/DVDs, e.g. DVDPlus,
otherwise the CD/DVD could jam and be impos-
Controls
sible to eject.<
General malfunctions
When loading CDs into or removing them from BMW CD/DVD players and changers have been
the CD magazine, hold them at the edge and do optimised for operation in vehicles. In some
Driving hints
not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
instances, they may be more sensitive to faulty
To load: CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
Insert one CD into each slot with the label side If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
uppermost.
has been inserted properly.
To empty:
Pull out the required slot and remove the CD. Humidity
A high level of humidity may cause the laser
Navigation
Inserting the CD magazine beam focusing lens to fog over and temporarily
prevent the CD/DVD from being played.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs

Should malfunctions occur only with individual
Entertainment
CDs/DVDs, one of the following factors may be
the cause:
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
With self-recorded CDs/DVDs, possible causes
Push the CD magazine all the way in, arrow 1, for output malfunctions are, e.g., an inconsist-
Communication
and close the cover, arrow 2. ent data creation or burning process, or low
The CD changer automatically reads in the con- quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
tained CDs and is then operational. Only label CDs/DVDs on the top with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Notes Damage
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are Avoid fingerprints, as well as dust, scratches
class 1 laser products. Never use them if and moisture.
the cover is damaged, otherwise there is a risk Store CDs/DVDs in a protective cover.
Mobility
of serious eye injuries. Do not expose CDs/DVDs to temperatures

Do not use CDs/DVDs with adhesive labels that above 506/1227, high levels of humidity or
have been affixed subsequently, as these may direct sunlight.
peel off while in the drive as a result of the tem-
peratures to which CDs are exposed during CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
Reference
playing, and could damage the system irrepara-

manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs
153
being impossible to play, or only playable with
restrictions.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
based on a number of registered U.S. patents
and intellectual property of the Macrovision
Corporation and other manufacturers. The use
of this copy protection must be approved by
Macrovision. Media with the corresponding
protection – unless otherwise agreed with Mac-
rovision – may only be shown privately. It is pro-
hibited to copy this technology.
DTS Digital SurroundTM

Manufactured under licence of US pat-
ent numbers: 5,451,942; 5,956,674;
5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 and other
patents issued and applied for in the USA and
worldwide. DTS and the logo are registered
trademarks and DTS Digital Surround and the
DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. © DTS,
Inc. All rights reserved.
154
Music collection*
Overview
Music memory Save from CDs/DVDs*
It is only possible to memorise CDs / DVDs from
Tracks from CDs and DVDs and USB media can
the CD/DVD player.
be stored in the music collection in the vehicle
and played from there. 1. Insert a CD/DVD in the CD/DVD player.
Controls
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com- 2. "CD/Multimedia"
pressed audio format on storage. If applica- 3. "CD/DVD"
ble, information on the album, e.g. the artist, 4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
is stored. player.
Driving hints
> CD/DVD or USB medium with compressed 5. "Save in car"
audio files: the entire content of the CD/
DVD or USB medium is stored as an album
in the vehicle. After memorising, tracks and
directories can be deleted individually. Only
the formats WMA, MP3 and AAC are
stored.
Tracks with copy protection, DRM, are
Navigation
stored in the vehicle, but cannot be played.
Back up music data regularly, as other-
wise it could be lost in the event of a fault
in the hard disk.< The music collection is displayed.
Music recognition technology and The tracks are memorised and played in
Entertainment
related data are provided by sequence from the music collection.
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry stand- During memorising, bear the following in mind:
ard in music recognition technology and related Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and
content delivery. For more information, please do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD
visit www.gracenote.com. player, as otherwise memorising is interrupted.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, It is possible to change over to the other audio
Communication
Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote. sources without interrupting memorising.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009 Tracks of the current CD/DVD that have already
Gracenote. This product and service may prac- been memorised can also be called up.
tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
#5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773, Interrupting memorising
#6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, 1. "CD/Multimedia"
#6,240,459, #6,330,593, and other patents
2. "CD/DVD"
issued or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Mobility
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-

marks by Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and
logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote"
logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Reference
155
3. "Saving..." It is only possible to memorise tracks
Music collection
from a USB medium via the USB interface

in the glove box.<
1. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter-
face in the glove box.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
4. "Cancel saving"
The memorising process is interrupted and can
be continued at any time.
Resuming memorising
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Continue saving"
Memorising the CD is continued at the start of
Music, playing
the track at which memorising was interrupted.
Music search
Information on the album
All tracks for which information is stored can be
During the memorising process, the informa-
called up via music search. All tracks for which
tion, e.g. the name of the artist, is stored for the
no information is stored can be called up via the
tracks if this information is available in the data-
corresponding album.
base in the vehicle or on the CD.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Please contact your Service for updating your
database. 2. "Music collection"
If no information is stored for the tracks, you can 3. "Music search"

update the entire album information via BMW
Online*, see page 158.
Memorising from a USB medium

To save music, a suitable medium must be con-
nected to the USB interface in the glove box.
> Suitable media: USB mass storage facili-
ties, e.g. USB memory sticks or MP3 play-
ers with USB interface.
> Unsuitable media: USB hard disks, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with a
number of bays, Apple iPod/iPhone.
156
4. Select the desired category. Currently playing
Overview
The last list of tracks generated by the music
search or the last album selected.
1. "Current playback"
Controls
5. Select the desired entry:
> Call up "A-Z search" and enter the
Driving hints
desired entry.
or 2. If applicable, select the desired track.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
Top 50
6. Select further categories as appropriate.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
order. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Not all categories need to be selected. If, for
Navigation
example, you wish to find all the tracks of a
3. "Top 50"
certain artist, call up only this artist. All
tracks by that artist will be displayed. 4. If applicable, select the desired track.
7. "Start playback"
Albums
Entertainment
Starting new music search All memorised albums, listed in the order of
their date of memorising. Symbols indicate the
"New search"
format.
Music search using voice input*
Symbol Format
Instructions on the voice input system, see
page 21. Audio CD
1. Press the button on the steering wheel. Compressed audio files Communication
2. {Music search}
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Call up the desired category, e.g.
{Select artist}. 2. "Music collection"
4. Say the desired entry on the list. 3. Select the desired album.
5. Select further categories as appropri-

ate.
Directly selecting tracks:
Mobility
{Title …}
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in one sentence.
Reference
157
Depending on the album, the tracks or sub- 5. "Rename album"
Music collection
directories of the album are displayed. The

first track might be played automatically.
4. To select a track, change directories if nec-
essary. Jog the controller to the left to
switch to a higher-level directory.
Random playback
All the tracks in the selection are played in ran-
dom order.
1. "CD/Multimedia" 6. Select the letters individually.
3. Call up "Options". Deleting album
4. "Random" It may not be possible to delete an album while
a track from that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
3. Highlight the desired album.
5. "Delete album"
Deleting directory and track

It may not be possible to delete a track while it is
being played,
Music, managing Or to delete a directory while a track from that
directory is being played.
Albums 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Renaming album 2. "Music collection"
If applicable, the name of the album is entered 3. Highlight the directory or track.
automatically during memorising. If the name is 4. Call up "Options".
unknown, it can be changed later. 5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".
If a track from the album is currently being
played, the album cannot be renamed. Album information*
1. "CD/Multimedia" If no information was stored for audio CDs on
2. "Music collection" memorising, it can be updated later via BMW
Online* as required.
3. Highlight the desired album.
The update takes place for each individual
album.
Updating album information via BMW

Online*
1. "CD/Multimedia"
158
3. Highlight the desired album. 6. "Music data import/export"
Overview
5. "Update album info online"
Controls
7. "Backup music on USB"
Driving hints
If memorising of the album information was
possible, the name of the album is displayed.
Free capacity
Display free capacity in the music collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
Navigation
Restoring a music collection in the
4. "Memory available"
vehicle
Music collection When music is memorised from a USB
Entertainment
medium, the existing music collection in
Backing up music collection the vehicle is replaced.<
The entire music collection can be backed up 1. "CD/Multimedia"

on a USB medium. Ensure that the USB 2. "Music collection"
medium has adequate free capacity. 3. Call up "Options".
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up 4. "Music data import/export"
Communication
the music collection can take several hours.
5. "Restore music from USB"
This is why it is best to make the backup during
a longer journey.
Deleting music collection
1. Start the engine.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter-
face in the glove box, see page 98.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Delete music collection"
Mobility
Reference
159
External devices
External devices
Overview Adjusting the volume

The volume of the sound output depends on
Symbol Meaning the audio device. If this volume deviates
strongly from other audio sources, it makes
AUX-IN port
sense to balance the volumes.
USB audio interface*/audio 1. "CD/Multimedia"
interface, mobile phone*
2. If applicable "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
AUX-IN port 4. "Volume"
You can connect an external audio device, for

instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks
over the vehicle's loudspeaker system. You can
adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume

setting is reached and press the controller.
USB audio interface*/

extended connectivity of the
Connection for audio playback: music player in the mobile
Jack plug 3.5 mm
phone*
To play audio tracks over the vehicle's loud-
speaker system, connect the headset or line- Connection of external audio devices / mobile
out port of the external device to the AUX-IN phones is possible. Operation takes place via
port. iDrive. The sound is output via the vehicle loud-
speakers.
Starting audio playback
Connection options for external
Connect the audio device, switch it on and
devices
select a track. Operation takes place at the
audio device. > Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3 player,
USB memory sticks or mobile phones that
Via iDrive
are supported by the USB audio interface.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
> Connection using the snap-in adapter*, see
2. If applicable "External devices" page 177, if your vehicle is equipped with
3. "AUX front" extended connectivity of the music player
to the mobile phone: Apple iPhone/mobile
160
phones. Playback is only possible if no After you connect for the first time, the informa-
Overview
audio device/mobile phone is connected to tion on all tracks (e.g. artist, music genre) as well
the USB audio interface. as the playlists of the USB device are trans-
The large number of audio devices/mobile ferred to the vehicle. This operation can take
phones available on the market means it cannot some time. How long it takes depends on the
be ensured that every audio device/mobile USB device and the number of tracks.
phone can be operated with the vehicle. During transfer, the tracks can be called up via
Ask your BMW Service which audio devices/ the file directory.
Controls
mobile phones are suitable. The information from up to four USB devices
can be stored in the vehicle, for a total of approx.
Audio files 16,000 tracks.
The common audio files, e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV If a fifth device is connected or if more than
(PCM) and AAC as well as playlists in the M3U
Driving hints
16,000 tracks are stored, the information of
format can be played. existing tracks is deleted.
Tracks with integrated Digital Rights
Connecting via USB audio interface
Management (DRM) cannot be played.<
Starting audio playback

If the audio device has a device name, this is
Navigation
displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
The name of the audio device might be dis-
Entertainment
1 AUX-IN port for audio playback: played.
Jack plug 3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Apple iPod/iPhone
Use the special cable adapter to connect an
Apple iPod/iPhone, which is available from Communication
Service. The cable adapter is required for a
proper connection.
Connect the Apple iPod/iPhone via cable
adapter for Apple iPod/iPhone with AUX-IN Playback starts with the first track. When an
port 1 and USB interface 2. Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in
The menu structure of the Apple iPod/iPhone is adapter and an audio device is simultaneously
supported by the USB audio interface. connected to the AUX-IN port, the audio signal
of the AUX-IN port is played.
Mobility
USB device
Connect using a flexible adapter cable. Information on the track
This protects the USB interface and your If information is stored for a track, this is dis-
USB device against mechanical damage.< played automatically:
Use a flexible adapter cable to connect the USB > Artist
Reference
device to connection 2. > Album title
161
> Number of tracks this artist. All tracks by that artist will be dis-
External devices
> File name of the track played.

6. "Start playback"
Searching for tracks
Selection options via: Starting a new track search
> Playlists "New search"
> Information: music genre, artist, album,

Playlists
titles
Calling up playlists.
> Additionally in the case of USB devices: file
directory, composer 1. "CD/Multimedia"
Tracks are displayed if their titles have been 2. "External devices"

stored in Latin letters. 3. Select the symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia" Currently playing
2. "External devices" List of currently played tracks.
3. Select the symbol. 1. "CD/Multimedia"
The name of the audio device might be dis- 2. "External devices"
played.
4. Select the desired category, "Genre", "Art-
4. "Current playback"
ist".
Random playback
You can play the tracks of the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of one artist.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
4. "Random"
All entries are shown in a list. You can use Fast forward/rewind
"A-Z search" to find certain entries. Press and hold the button for the appro-
> Call up "A-Z search" and enter the priate direction.
desired entry. When you enter a charac-
ter, a filter is run on the basis of this char- Notes
acter as the first letter. When you enter Do not expose the audio device to
several characters, all the results that extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
contain this character string are dis- very high temperatures, see operating instruc-
played. tions of the audio device. Otherwise, the audio
> Select the desired entry from the list. device can be damaged, thus reducing driving
safety while the vehicle is being driven.<
5. Select further categories as appropriate.
Depending on the configuration of the audio
Not all categories need to be selected. If, for
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 Kbit/s, per-
example, all the tracks of a certain artist are
fect playback cannot be ensured in every case.
to be displayed, it is sufficient to call up only
162
Information regarding connection
Overview
> The connected audio device is supplied
with a maximum power of 500 mA if the
device supports this. For this reason, do not
connect the device to a socket in the vehi-
cle.
> Do not force the connector into the USB
Controls
interface.
> Do not connect any devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard disks.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
Driving hints
charge external devices.
Navigation
Entertainment
Communication
Mobility
Reference
163
Communication
This chapter summarises how to make
telephone calls and how to use BMW Assist and
BMW TeleServices.

Telephone*
Telephone
The principle Suitable mobile phones

Your BMW is equipped with a mobile phone Ask BMW Service for details of which mobile
provision. As soon as you have performed a phones with a Bluetooth interface are sup-
once-only logging-on procedure in the vehicle ported by the mobile phone provision and for
with a suitable mobile phone, you will also be which mobile phones there are snap-in adapt-
able to operate it via iDrive, the buttons on the ers available. These mobile phones, in conjunc-
steering wheel and the voice control*. tion with a specific software status, support the
A mobile phone that has previously been functions described in these Operating Instruc-
logged on is automatically identified again as tions. Other types of mobile phone could mal-
soon as it is brought inside the vehicle if the function.
engine is running or the ignition switched on.
The log-on data of up to four mobile phones can
be retained at any one time. If more than one Operating options
mobile phone is identified at the same time,
You can operate the mobile phone via:
whichever mobile phone was logged on most
recently can be operated via the vehicle. > Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 10
> iDrive, see page 16
> Voice control*, see page 174
Phoning from inside the > Favourites buttons, see page 19
vehicle Avoid operating a mobile phone that has been
identified by the vehicle via the phone's keypad,
Use of the snap-in adapter* otherwise it could malfunction.
The snap-in adapter, a type of mobile phone
holder, enables you to recharge the battery and
connect the mobile phone to the external aerial Initial operation
of your vehicle. This will assure better network
reception and consistent sound quality. BMW Logging mobile phone on in the vehicle
Service knows for which mobile phones there
The following conditions must be met:
are snap-in adapters available.
> Suitable mobile phone: the mobile phone is
For your safety supported by the mobile phone provision.
You will find information on the Internet at:
A car phone provides many services, and can
www.bmw.com/bluetooth
even save lives. You will find safety instructions
in the separate operating instructions of your > The mobile phone must be operational.
mobile phone, but please comply with the fol- > The Bluetooth on the vehicle, see
lowing additional instructions: page 168, and on the mobile phone must
Only make inputs when it is safe to do so have been activated.
without risk to yourself or other road
users. Do not hold the mobile phone in your
hand while driving; use the hands-free unit
instead. You could otherwise be distracted and
put both the occupants of your vehicle and
other road users at risk.<
166
> Depending on the mobile phone, initial The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
Overview
adjustments have to be made on the mobile played.
phone, e.g. via the following menu items:
> Bluetooth activated Preparation via the mobile phone
> Allow connection without further prompt 6. Further procedures must be performed on
the mobile phone; these may vary depend-
> Reconnect
ing on the type of mobile phone, see the
> Depending on the mobile phone type, set- operating instructions for your mobile
Controls
ting the power economy mode, for instance, phone, e.g. under locating, connecting up
may result in a logged-on mobile phone not or pairing Bluetooth device.
being identified by the vehicle. The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is shown
> To log on, choose any 4-16-digit number as on the display of the mobile phone.
the Bluetooth passkey, e.g. 25081107. A 7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
Driving hints
number that is as long and complex as pos- the mobile phone display.
sible provides greater protection against
unauthorised access. This Bluetooth pass- Logging in
key is no longer required once you have
Depending on the type of mobile phone; you are
successfully logged on.
successively requested first by the display on
> The ignition must be switched on. the mobile phone or the iDrive to enter the same
Only log on the mobile phone while the Bluetooth passkey that you defined.
Navigation
vehicle is at a standstill so as not to 8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
endanger the vehicle's occupants and other Depending on the type of mobile phone,
road users as a result of being distracted.< you will have around 30 seconds to enter
the Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
Switch on ignition and on the Control Display.
Entertainment
1. Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition switch.
2. Switch on the ignition and, in addition, press
the start/stop button without operating the
brake or clutch pedal.
Communication
Preparation via iDrive
3. "Telephone"
4. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
5. "Add new device" If log-on was successful, the mobile phone
appears in the first position in the list of mobile
phones.
After initial registration

> Mobile phone is detected/paired in the vehi-
Mobility
cle after a short delay when the engine is

running or the ignition switched on.
> As soon as a mobile phone is identified by
the vehicle, the phone book entries stored
on the SIM card or in your mobile phone are
Reference
transferred to your vehicle. Transferring this
167
data depends on the type of mobile phone, is connected. If another mobile phone is to be
Telephone
see operating instructions for your mobile connected, this can be selected.
phone if appropriate. Transferring the 1. "Telephone"
entries may take several minutes.
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
> Four mobile phones can be registered.
3. Select the desired mobile phone.
> Some mobile phones may require certain
settings, authorisation or secure connec-
tion, see operating instructions of the
mobile phone.
If not all of the telephone book entries are dis-
played:
> If necessary, transfer all telephone book
entries from the SIM card to the mobile
phone.
> Telephone book entries with special char-
acters may sometimes not be displayed. Logging mobile phone off in the vehicle
1. "Telephone"
If log-on is not successful, check the 2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
following
3. Highlight the mobile phone to be logged off.
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone provision? You will find infor- 4. Call up "Options".
mation on the Internet at: www.bmw.com/ 5. "Remove device from list"
bluetooth.
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and vehicle agree? The same Blue-
tooth passkey must be entered on the dis-
play of the mobile phone and via iDrive.
> Did you need longer than 30 seconds to
enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then repeat
the log-on procedure.
> Too many Bluetooth devices paired to the
mobile phone? If applicable, delete connec- The logged-off mobile phone is deleted
tion with other devices. from the list.
> Does the mobile phone no longer respond? The telephone book entries and the list of
Switch the mobile phone off and on again or stored phone numbers are also deleted.
disconnect the power supply.
> Repeat registration. Deactivating/activating Bluetooth
connection
> If all the points in the list have been checked
Bluetooth technology is not permitted in
and you are still unable to connect the
all countries. Observe the legal require-
mobile phone, contact the hotline.
ments of the country in which you are travelling.
Temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth connec-
Connecting a certain mobile phone
tion between the vehicle and the mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by if necessary.
the vehicle, the mobile phone furthest up the list If the Bluetooth connection is deactivated, you
are no longer able to operate the mobile phone
168
via the vehicle but it will still be possible to use > Accepting/rejecting a call
Overview
other devices with a Bluetooth interface via the > Dialling a phone number
mobile phone, e.g. a laptop.<
> Dialling a number from the phone book
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth con-
> Dialling stored numbers, e.g. from the list of
nection between your vehicle and your mobile
received calls
phone:
> Ending a call
1. "Telephone"
With the ignition switched off but in the radio
Controls
ready state, e.g. after the remote control has
3. "Bluetooth" been removed, you can continue a call via the
hands-free unit for a number of minutes.
Voice quality
Driving hints
Loud background noises may cause the person
with whom you are telephoning to have difficul-
ties in understanding you. The mobile phone
provision is able to compensate for these
noises to a certain extent. To optimise voice
quality during a call, we recommend that you:
> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing
Navigation
Volume adjustment windows, reducing the air volume from the
automatic air conditioning or angling the
open front air vents downwards.
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free unit.
Entertainment
Conditions
> The mobile phone's log-on data have been
stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone
is on standby.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
Turn the knob until the desired volume is
switched on.
Communication
reached.
> The mobile phone is identified by the vehi-
Adjust volume:
cle.
> Ringing tone volume
> Call volume Receiving a call
These volume settings are retained for the If the number of the person calling you is stored
hands-free system even if you set other audio in the phone book and the number is not with-
sources to minimum values. held, the name under which it is stored is dis-
played.
rently in use.
Mobility
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
Operation via iDrive or
You can operate the following functions via

Reference
iDrive:
169
"Accept" 4. Select the symbol to set up the connec-
Telephone
tion
Rejecting a call
or
"Reject"
Press the button on the steering wheel.
The calling party is redirected to your voicemail
if it was activated. It is also possible to enter the phone number
using voice input*, see page 174.
Ending a call For your phone number to be displayed to the
Press the button on the steering wheel person you are talking to, the caller display
function must be enabled by your service pro-
or
vider.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls" Calls with a number of participants
3. Select the active call. It is possible to switch between calls and merge
two calls to set up a conference. The functions
must be supported by the mobile phone and
service provider.
Accepting a call during another call

This function depends on the service provider
and might have to be enabled. The mobile
phone might have to be configured for this serv-
ice.
If there is a second call during an ongoing call
Dialling a number you hear a call waiting signal, if applicable.
1. "Telephone" "Accept"
2. "Dial number" The call is accepted and the existing call is held.
3. Select the digits individually.
Setting up a second call
Set up another call during a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
170
3. "Hold" number is entered. The entries can be selected
Overview
and a call set up.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
All contacts with telephone number are dis-
played. A symbol indicates the storage location
of the contacts.
Controls
The current call is held.
4. Dial a new phone number or select from a
Driving hints
list.
Switching between two calls,

alternating
> Active call: indicated by a red telephone
handset Symbol Storage location
> Held call: indicated by a green telephone No symbol In the vehicle, address not
Navigation
handset checked as destination.
To switch to the held call, select this. In the vehicle, address
checked as destination.
Setting up a conference
Mobile phone
Two calls can be merged to set up a telephone
Entertainment
conference. BMW Online address book*
1. Setting up two calls.
Calling a contact
2. "Conference call"
1. Select the desired contact.
In the case of contacts with a telephone
number, a connection is established.
In the case of contacts with a number of tel- Communication
ephone numbers:
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Symbol Meaning
Contact with a telephone
On termination, both calls are always termi-
number.
nated. If one call is terminated by another sub-
Mobility
scriber, the other call is continued, if required. Contact with more than one
telephone number.
Phone book Call not possible, mobile
The telephone book accesses the contacts* phone without reception or
and shows all the contacts where a telephone network or TeleService
call* active.
Reference
171
Editing contacts 6. "Save contact in car"
Telephone
Changing the contact entries. If a contact is

changed, the changes are not saved on the Incoming calls
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is saved in The last 20 incoming calls are displayed.
the vehicle. 1. "Telephone"
1. Highlight the contact. 2. "Received calls"
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redial
The eight phone numbers last dialled are
stored.
Dialling numbers via iDrive

1. "Telephone" Dialling a number
2. "Last number redial" Select the entry.
Deleting entries
1. Highlight the entry.
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in 'Contacts'

1. Highlight the entry.
3. Select the desired entry.
3. "Save as new contact" or "Add to existing
Deleting an individual entry or all contact".
entries 4. Select the type of number: "Home",
1. Highlight the entry. "Work", "Mobile" or "Others".
2. Call up "Options". 5. If necessary, complete the entries.
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list". 6. "Save contact"
Saving an entry in 'Contacts' Messages

1. Highlight the entry. Various message types can be displayed:
2. Call up "Options". > SMS
The display of texts depends on whether
data transfer into the vehicle is supported
contact".
by the mobile phone. It is possible that texts
4. Select the type of number: "Home", are not supported by the service provider or
"Work", "Mobile" or "Others". must be enabled separately.
5. If necessary, complete the entries. > Messages from My Info
172
> Messages from BMW Assist information 1. Select the message that contains the
Overview
service desired number.
> Emails from BMW Online* 2. "Call"
Displaying messages Message from information service

1. "Telephone" Incorporating an address into route guidance*:
2. "Messages" 1. Select the message.
Controls
A symbol indicates the type of message. 2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".
Symbol Storage location
SMS
Driving hints
My Info
Message from information
service
3. Select the desired message.
SMS
3. If necessary, start the route guidance.
Navigation
Calling the sender of a text message:
Dialling a phone number:
1. Select the message.
2. "Call"
3. "Call sender"
Saving an address:
Entertainment
Saving the sender in Contacts:
1. Select the message.
3. "Save contact in car"
contact".
Deleting messages
Communication
My Info 1. Select the message to be deleted.
Replying: 2. Call up "Options".
Send a predefined reply. 3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages"
Emails from BMW Online*
Emails from the BMW Online portal can be dis-
3. "Answer" played. For this purpose, log-on to BMW
Starting route guidance: Online, see page 183.
1. Select the message that contains the 1. "Telephone"
Mobility
desired destination. 2. "Messages"

2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another 3. Call up "Options".
dest.".
4. "E-mail (BMW Online)"
Dialling the number in the message:
If this text does not appear, log-on to BMW
Reference
Online.
173
Switching between mobile Conditions
Telephone
phone and hands-free unit The same conditions apply as for operation via
iDrive, see page 169.
From the mobile phone to the hands-
free unit* Speaking commands
You can continue a call commenced outside the
Bluetooth range of the vehicle via the hands-
Activating voice control
free unit if the engine is running or the ignition is 1. Briefly press the button on the steering
switched on. Depending on the type of mobile wheel.
phone, changeover to the hands-free mode An acoustic signal indicates that you can
may take place automatically. say commands.
For mobile phones that do not change over 2. Say a command.
automatically to hands-free operation:
Some models of mobile phone allow you to
Terminating/cancelling operation via
continue the call via the hands-free unit. Pro-
voice control
ceed according to the instructions shown on Press the button on the steering wheel
the display of the mobile phone, see operating briefly
instructions of your mobile phone. or
{Cancel}.
From the hands-free unit to the mobile
In dialogues not involving commands, i.e. when
phone
you are speaking text such as names, cancel-
If you are conducting a conversation via the ling is possible only with the button on the
hands-free unit, you may also be able to con- steering wheel.
tinue the call via the mobile phone depending
on its type. Proceed according to the instruc- Having possible commands read aloud
tions shown on the display of the mobile phone,
The system understands predefined com-
see operating instructions of your mobile
mands which need to be given exactly, word for
phone.
word.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth You can have the available commands read out
connection, see page 168. to you at any point:
Depending on the type of your mobile phone, if {Help}.
the mobile phone network reception conditions
are poor, the conversation may be switched Digits from zero to nine are understood.
from the hands-free unit to the mobile phone. You can say each digit individually or say the
entire number as a block to speed up the input
process.
Operation by voice control*
Using alternative commands
The principle There are often several different commands
> You can operate your mobile phone without available for performing the same function, e.g.:
having to take your hands off the steering {Dial name} or {Name}.
wheel.
> {...} Identifies commands for the voice con-
trol system.
174
An example: dialling a phone number
Overview
To start the dialogue:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
You say The voice recognition answers
{Dial number} {{Please say the number}}

E.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on the equipment:
Controls
{{123 456 7890. Continue?}}
{Dial} The system dials the number shown.
Adjusting the volume of Correcting a number

announcements
Driving hints
Once the system has repeated the last
You can adjust the volume for announcements sequence of digits you gave, you can delete
of the system: that sequence of digits.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
You can repeat the {Correct number} command
as often as you want, even deleting all the digits
Navigation
in this way if necessary.
Deleting a phone number

{Delete}.
All previously entered digits are deleted.
Entertainment
Turn the knob during an announcement.
This volume is retained for announcements Redial
even if you set other audio sources to minimum To redial the number last dialled:
values.
{Redial}.
rently in use. Voice-activated phone book*
Making a call
Depending on the equipment available in your Communication
vehicle, it may be necessary to create a sepa-
rate voice-activated phone book.
Dialling a number
The entries must be made using voice control
1. {Dial number}.
and are independent of the memory of your
2. Say the phone number. mobile phone. Hence, in this case, phone num-
When making an international call, say bers stored in your mobile phone cannot be
{Plus} and then the international dial- called up via the voice control or stored there.
ling code. Up to 50 entries can be set up. An entry always
Mobility
3. {Dial}. consists of a name and a phone number.

The connection with the desired subscriber is
established. Creating and editing a voice-activated
phone book
To save the entry:
Reference
175
An entry always consists of a name and a phone Selecting an entry
Telephone
number. The connection to the phone number of the

1. {Save name}. selected entry is established.
2. Say the name. 1. {Dial name}.
The time it takes to say a name in the The dialogue for dialling an entry is
voice-activated phone book must not called up.
exceed about 2 seconds. 2. When asked to do so, say the name.
3. When prompted by the system, say the 3. Confirm request with {Yes}.
phone number.
4. To save the phone number: Notes
{Save}.
To delete the entry: Information for emergency calls
You can delete any entry from the voice-acti- Do not use the voice control system for emer-
vated phone book. gency calls. In stress situations, the spoken lan-
guage and voice pitch can change. This delays
1. {Delete name}.
establishment of a telephone connection
The dialogue for deleting an entry is unnecessarily. Instead, use the emergency call
called up.
button*, see page 216.
2. When asked to do so, say the name.
3. Confirm request with {Yes}. To note when using the voice control
Deleting all entries: When using the voice control, note the follow-
ing:
{Delete phonebook} deletes all the entries in
the phone book. > Say commands, digits and letters fluently
and in a normal volume, intonation and
1. {Delete phonebook}.
speed.
The dialogue for deleting the phone
book is called up. > Always say the commands in the language
of the voice input system.
2. Confirm request with {Yes}.
> Keep doors, windows and panorama glass
3. Confirm the repeated query with {Yes}.
roof* closed to avoid noise interference
Reading out and dialling entries: from outside the vehicle.
You can have all entries in your voice-activated > Avoid causing background noise in the
phone book read out in the sequence in which vehicle while you are speaking.
they were input and select a particular entry in
order to establish a connection:
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialogue for reading out the phone
book is called up.
2. {Dial number}, if the desired entry is
being read aloud.
176
Inserting/removing the snap- that the mobile phone can engage in the
Overview
snap-in adapter.
in adapter*
2. Push the mobile phone with the keys
1. Press button 1 and take off the cover. upwards towards the electrical connections
and press down until it engages.
Controls
Driving hints
2. Insert the snap-in adapter at the front and
press down until it engages. The battery of the mobile phones is charged as
of the radio ready state or unlocked steering.
So as not to deplete the batteries of the
vehicle, telephone calls with the ignition
switched off should be avoided.<
Navigation
Removing the mobile phone
Entertainment
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press button 1.
Communication
Press the button.
Inserting the mobile phone

1. Remove the protective cap from the mobile
phone's aerial connector if necessary so
Mobility
Reference
177
Contacts*
Contacts
You can create and edit contacts. Contacts Defining a contact as home address
from the mobile phone* as well as contact from You can save a contact as your home address. It
the BMW Online address book are also dis- is the first entry in "My contacts".
played if the mobile phone supports this func-
1. "Home address"
tion*. The addresses can be used as navigation
destinations and the phone numbers dialled 2. Create contact.
directly.
My contacts
New contact List of all contacts from the vehicle, the mobile
1. "Contacts" phone and the BMW Online address book*.
2. "New contact"
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
3. If the input fields are still occupied with the

previous entries, select "Clear fields" if
applicable.
4. To complete the input fields: All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Select the symbol beside the input field. Depending on the number of contacts, the A-Z
search is offered. A symbol indicates the stor-
age location of the contacts:
Symbol Storage location

No symbol In the vehicle, address not
In the vehicle, address
Mobile Phone*
5. Enter text.
BMW Online address book*
If the vehicle is equipped with a navi-
gation system, only addresses that Showing detailed view*
are present in the vehicle's navigation data
Select the desired contact.
can be entered. This ensures that route
All completed fields of the contact are dis-
guidance is possible for all addresses.<
played.
6. "Save contact in car"
178
Selecting sort order for names from BMW Online can be synchronised with the
Overview
You can change the order in which names are navigation data.
sorted and displayed. 1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
1. "My contacts" address.
2. Highlighting contact 2. Call up "Options".
3. Call up "Options". 3. "Check as destination"
4. "Show: surname, first name" or "Show: first 4. If necessary, correct and save the address.
Controls
name, surname" If the address is corrected and saved, a copy is
Depending on how contacts are displayed on created in the vehicle. The address is not
your mobile phone, the display of names can changed on the mobile phone or at BMW
differ from the selected display format. Online*.
Driving hints
Display BMW Online* contacts Dial the number*
When you log on to BMW Online, see page 183, 1. "My contacts"
you must activate the "Login automatically" 2. Select the desired contact.
function in order to view BMW Online contacts. 3. Select the desired phone number.
Displaying additional information from
BMW Online*
Navigation
Editing contacts
Display of additional information for a contact if
1. "My contacts"
present at BMW Online.
3. "Edit contact"
Entertainment
3. "Further info (BMW Online)"
Selecting a contact as navigation

destination
1. "My contacts"
Communication
3. Select the desired address.
It is possible that the addresses of the mobile
phone* and from the BMW Online address 4. Change entries.
book* do not comply with the navigation data
5. Jog the controller to the left.
contained in the vehicle. This means that route
guidance cannot be taken over. If that is the 6. "Yes"
case: When editing a contact coming from the mobile
Correct the address manually. phone* or BMW Online*, the changes are not
saved on the mobile phone or BMW Online*. A
Mobility
Check the address as destination* copy of the entry is stored in the vehicle and
It must be possible to match the address that is only the copy is displayed. Under certain cir-
to be adopted into the route guidance to the cumstances an identical contact entry is cre-
navigation data contained in the vehicle. An ated.
address stored on the mobile phone or coming
Reference
179
Deleting contacts
Contacts
Only contacts saved in the vehicle are deleted.

Contacts from the mobile phone* or BMW
Online* cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
180
BMW Services*
Overview
BMW Assist* > In the case of a mobile phone with UMTS
capability: data transfer is switched to solely
BMW Assist provides certain services, e.g. an GSM data transfer.
information service.
> The SIM card is enabled for free service
Controls
The exact offering is country-specific. Your numbers.
BMW Service will be glad to answer any ques-
> There is mobile radio communications
tions you might have.
reception.
BMW Assist can also be used via the Internet,
> The engine is running.
where other services are available:
Driving hints
www.bmw.com
During a connection to BMW Assist, it might be Information service*
that no telephone connection can be estab-
lished via the mobile phone. If the mobile phone When you call the BMW Assist information
is to be used, log it out from the vehicle, see service, you can, for example, obtain informa-
page 168. tion on restaurants, all-night chemists, filling
stations or hotels and have phone numbers and
addresses transmitted to you.
Navigation
BMW TeleServices* Afterwards, you can dial a phone number
directly or incorporate an address into the route
BMW TeleServices supports communication
guidance system*.
with BMW Service.
> Data regarding the service requirements of Starting the information service
Entertainment
the vehicle can be transferred directly to
1. "BMW Services"
BMW Service. This enables BMW Service
to prepare for the necessary work in 2. "Info plus"
advance. The workshop stay is shortened.
> In the event of a breakdown, data regarding
the condition of the vehicle can be trans-
Communication
ferred to Mobile Service*. It might be that
malfunctions can be remedied directly.
> The offering is country-specific.
> Connection charges can be incurred.
> Services can be limited abroad.
Conditions 3. "Start service"

> BMW Assist is activated. A voice connection is established to the BMW
information service.
> If BMW Assist is not enabled, the selected
Mobility
mobile communications network must sup- You are connected with an employee at the
port Circuit Switched Data, CSD, phone BMW information service to obtain the desired
number transfer must be enabled and a information. You can then have the phone
mobile phone recommended by BMW for number and address sent to you and transfer
TeleServices must be connected to the them, for instance, into the route guidance sys-
Reference
vehicle. tem of the navigation system. The BMW infor-
181
mation service can directly make reservations in 3. "Start service"
BMW Services
many hotels. On reception of information, a list

of pick up messages is displayed automatically.
Call up the message using the message list, see
page 173.
Breakdown recovery
You can contact the BMW Group Mobile Serv-
ice* if you require assistance in the event of a
breakdown.
BMW TeleServices diagnosis*
Starting Roadside Assistance The BMW TeleServices diagnosis enables the
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
Equipment without BMW Assist or required for the diagnosis of the vehicle by
BMW TeleServices mobile phone. These data are transferred auto-
1. "BMW Services" matically.
2. "BMW Mobile Care" A voice connection to the mobile service is

established after transmission of the data.
The number of Roadside Assistance is dis-
played. If a mobile phone* is logged on, a
BMW TeleServices Help*
connection to BMW Roadside Assistance is
established. BMW Teleservices Help enables a more
detailed diagnosis of the vehicle by Mobile
Service per mobile telephony. Following a
prompt from Mobile Service and after breaking
the voice connection, the Teleservices Help
can be started.
Starting Teleservices Help

1. Park the vehicle safely.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Engine is running.
Equipment with BMW Assist or BMW 4. "Teleservice Help"
TeleServices
After completion of the Teleservices Help, a
1. "BMW Services"
voice connection to Mobile Service is estab-
2. "BMW Mobile Care" lished.
Activating BMW Assist*

If you have a valid contract with BMW Assist
and the services are not displayed, these might
have to be activated.
182
1. Ensure that the vehicle can determine its Starting BMW Online
Overview
current location. This is normally possible in 1. "BMW Services"
the open air.
2. "BMW Online"
3. "Activate Assist"
The activation can take a few minutes. If you call
up another menu, the activation continues to
Controls
run in the background.
BMW Online*
BMW Online is an internet portal that provides
Driving hints
you with certain in-vehicle services, e.g. infor- 3. If applicable, select "OK".
mation on the weather, current news, share
The BMW Online start page is displayed.
prices, access to e-mails and a personal
address book.
Using BMW Online
Licence agreement:
To select and display content:
This product contains NetFront Browser Soft-
ware by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007 > Turn the controller to highlight an element.
Navigation
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront > Press the controller to display the element.
is a trademark or a registered trademark of
ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other coun- Call up home page
tries. 1. Call up "Options".
Parts of the software contained in this product 2. "Display start page"
Entertainment
are based on work of the Independent JPEG
Group.
Conditions
> You have registered for BMW Online with
BMW Service.
Communication
> A mobile communications network must be
available.
> The vehicle must be able to determine the
location for certain services, e.g. for infor-
mation at the location. Reloading a page
> The current date is set on the Control Dis- 1. Call up "Options".
play. 2. "Reload"
Cancelling
Mobility
2. "Cancel loading"
Logging in
To display contacts of BMW Online or other
Reference
personal data, log on is required.
183
1. "BMW Services" Internet*
BMW Services
2. "BMW Online"
3. Call up "Options". General
4. "User login" For your own safety, the internet is available
only up to a speed of approximately 5 km/h or
3 mph; in some national market versions inter-
net access is available only when the vehicle is
at a complete standstill.
Calling up the internet

1. "BMW Services"
2. "Internet"
5. "User:"
3. If applicable, "OK"
The home page is displayed. It is possible that
the Internet sites are not displayed in the same
6. Enter user name and select "OK".
way as on a PC. Flash or Java applications may
7. "Password:" be displayed incorrectly.
8. Enter password. Licence agreement:
9. "OK" This product contains NetFront Browser Soft-
ware by ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
Automatic login ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront
is a trademark or a registered trademark of
The login takes place automatically when BMW
ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other coun-
Online is called up.
tries.
"Login automatically"
Parts of the software contained in this product
are based on work of the Independent JPEG
Logging off
Group.
1. "BMW Services"
2. "BMW Online"
4. "User logoff"
184
Operating the Internet Enter Internet addresses
Overview
Menu bar
2. Select letters and characters of the desired
A menu bar for operation is displayed. To acti- address individually.
vate a menu bar, jog the controller to the left and Jog the controller upwards to switch
right until the cursor is in the menu bar. between upper and lower case.
3. Select "OK".
Symbol Function
Controls
Activate mouse pointer
Call up home page
Update, reload
Back
Driving hints
Enter URL
Bookmarks/favourites
Zoom
Close the browser Bookmarks/favourites
Navigating with the mouse pointer Adding bookmarks
Navigation
1. Select the symbol or jog the controller to The currently displayed page is stored as a
the right. bookmark.
2. Navigate to page with mouse pointer. 1. Select the symbol.
> To move the mouse pointer: jog the con- 2. "Add to bookmarks"
Entertainment
troller in the respective direction.
> Moving the mouse pointer diagonally:
jog the controller in the respective direc-
tion and turn the controller.
> To select an element: move the mouse
pointer onto the element and press the
Communication
controller.
> To scroll: turn the controller.
Status display
Selecting bookmarks
A symbol in the top left of the Control Display
shows the status. 1. Select the symbol.
2. Select the desired bookmark.
Symbol Function
No connection possible
Deleting bookmarks
Mobility

Data transfer/connection
2. Mark the bookmark that you would like to
Secure connection delete.
Reference
185
4. "Delete bookmark" or "Delete all book- Hotline
BMW Services
marks".
Overview
The BMW Hotline provides you with informa-
tion covering every aspect of your vehicle.
Calling the hotline
Equipment with BMW Assist or BMW

TeleServices
1. "BMW Services"
Specifying a bookmark as home page 2. "Hotline"
1. Select the symbol. 3. "Start service"
2. Highlight the desired bookmark. A voice connection to the BMW hotline is

established.
4. "Set as start page" Equipment without BMW Assist or
BMW TeleServices
Settings 1. "BMW Services"
Suppressing cookies 2. "Hotline"
1. Call up "Options". The telephone number of the hotline is dis-

played. With mobile phone provision, a voice
2. "Suppress cookies"
connection is established if applicable.
Suppressing pop-ups
2. "Suppress pop-ups"
Suppressing security warnings

2. "Suppress HTTPS pop-ups"
BMW TeleServices*
TeleServices call*
Activating TeleServices
Overview
The TeleServices must be activated in the vehi-
cle to be able to use them. In most cases this is You can send information to BMW Service indi-
already done by your Service partner. cating that you wish to arrange a service
appointment. The TeleServices data are trans-
If the services are not displayed, they might
ferred. Your Service partner will contact you if
have to be activated.
possible.
1. "BMW Services"
2. "BMW TeleServices"
186
Starting a TeleServices call Display Service partner
Overview
1. "BMW Services" 1. "BMW Services"
2. "Teleservice Call" 2. "Your BMW Dealer"
3. "Start service"
Data transmission*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
Controls
1. "BMW Services"
3. "Data transfer"
Driving hints
Service status*
Automatic TeleServices call* Display available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
The TeleServices data on the service status of
your vehicle are transmitted automatically to 1. "BMW Services"
your BMW Service before a due date. If possi- 2. "Service status"
Navigation
ble, BMW Service will contact you and you can
3. "Available services"
make a service appointment.
You can check when your BMW Service partner Activating BMW Assist
was notified.
If these services are not displayed and you have
1. "Vehicle information" a valid Assist agreement, they must be acti-
Entertainment
2. "Vehicle status" vated.
"Activate Assist"
Activate BMW TeleServices

It is possible that you must activate TeleServ-
ices in the vehicle.
"Activate TeleServices" Communication
Deactivating BMW TeleServices

A voice connection to Mobile Service is still
3. Call up "Options". possible if TeleServices are deactivated.
4. "Last Teleservice Call" "Deactivate TeleServices"
Service partners*
Mobility
Address and contact data of the BMW Service

partner.
Reference
187
Mobility
To assist you in preserving your vehicle's
mobility, this section contains important
information on operating fluids, wheels and
tyres, routine maintenance work and minor
repairs.

Refuelling
Refuelling
Tank cap
Opening
1. Tap the tank cap at the rear edge.
1. Push the cover to the back and out of the

luggage compartment side panel and
remove.
2. Pull the tank cap with the fuel pump symbol
from the mount. The fuel filler flap is
2. Turn the tank cap counter-clockwise.
released.
3. Place the tank cap in the holder on the flap.
Note when refuelling

When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into
the filler neck. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle dur-
ing refuelling, otherwise:
> The supply of fuel may be cut off prema-
turely
> Fuel vapour and fumes will be fed back less
effectively.
Closing The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts
Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is out for the first time.
clearly heard to click into place.
Observe the safety regulations displayed
Do not jam the strap attached to the tank at service stations when handling fuels,
cap, as otherwise the tank cap cannot be as otherwise there is a risk of personal injury
closed properly and fuel vapours can escape.< and damage to property.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap

E.g. in the event of an electrical defect. Fuel tank capacity
Petrol engine, fuel tank capacity: approx.
63 litres or 13.8 Imp. gal.
Diesel engine, fuel tank capacity: approx.
61 litres or 13.4 Imp. gal.
190
add fuel, otherwise the engine's functions are
Overview
not assured and damage may occur.<
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
Entertainment
Communication
Mobility
Reference
191
Fuel
Fuel
Fuel grade Winter-grade diesel

Do not add any additives, not even petrol,
Petrol to avoid engine damage.<
For optimal fuel economy, the petrol should be You are required to use winter-grade diesel dur-
sulphur-free or as low in sulphur content as ing the cold season to ensure operational safety
possible. of the diesel engine.
Never use fuel containing lead, as other- This type of fuel is sold by service stations dur-
wise the catalytic converter will be perma- ing this period of time.
nently damaged.< Fuel filter heating is installed as standard equip-
You can fill up with fuels with a maximum pro- ment to prevent the fuel from solidifying during
portion of ethanol of 10Ξ, i.e. E10. operation.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel con-
taining 85Ξ ethanol, nor with flex fuel.
Otherwise the engine and fuel supply system
will be damaged.<
Petrol grades
The engine is anti-knock controlled. For this
reason, several fuel grades can be refuelled.
We recommend unleaded premium grade pet-
rol with 95 RON.
Unleaded fuel grades with 91 RON and higher
are permitted.
Do not fill the tank with any petrol below
91 RON, as otherwise the engine could
be damaged.<
Diesel
Do not use rapeseed methyl ester RME,
biodiesel or petrol.
If the wrong type of fuel has been added, do not
start the engine, otherwise you risk causing
damage to it.<
The filler neck is designed for refuelling at die-
sel pumps.
Contact Service if the wrong type of fuel has
been added.
Diesel grade
The engine is designed for DIN EN 590 diesel
fuel.
192
Wheels and tyres
Overview
Tyre pressures mentioned on the label. Since inflation pres-
sures for tyres that may be covered by the label
Safety information – by size, speed category and load rating/load
index – but not explicitly mentioned on the label
Tyre characteristics and tyre inflation pressure
Controls
may be different, please obtain adequate infla-
influence the following:
tion pressures in accordance with the tyre man-
> Service life of the tyres ufacturer's specifications at your tyre dealer.<
> Driving safety
> Driving comfort Tyre sizes
Driving hints
These tyre pressure values apply to the
Checking pressures approved tyre sizes and makes.
Check the tyre pressure regularly and Your Service can provide you with more infor-
correct, if applicable: at least twice a mation on wheels and tyres.
month and before setting out on any long jour-
ney. Incorrect tyre pressures can adversely
affect the vehicle's roadholding and cause tyre Tyre tread
damage, which could result in an accident.<
Navigation
Reinitialise Run Flat Indicator after correcting Summer tyres
the tyre inflation pressure. Do not use tyres below a tread depth of 3 mm or
1/8 in.
Tyre pressure values There is a high risk of aquaplaning with a tread
Entertainment
depth of less than 3 mm or approx. 1/8 in.
Winter tyres
Do not use tyres below a tread depth of 4 mm or
approx. 3/16 in.
Winter suitability is restricted below a tread
Communication
depth of 4 mm or approx. 3/16 in.
Minimum tread depth

Pressure values for approved tyre sizes are
located on the door column of the driver's door.
If you are unable to find the tyres' speed code
letter, the tyre inflation pressure of the respec-
tive size applies, e.g. 255/45 R 17.
For customers in Australia/New

Mobility
Zealand
Inflation pressures are specified on the tyre
label affixed to the driver's door post. Wear indicators are distributed around the
The inflation pressures on the tyre label tyre's circumference. They have a legally
Reference
are applicable only for tyres explicitly
193
required minimum height of 1.6 mm or approx. Wheel/tyre combination
Wheels and tyres
1/16 in. Your Service will provide you with information

These are indicated by the letters TWI, Tread on the correct wheel/tyre combination and the
Wear Indicator, on the tyre flanks. correct rim design for your vehicle.
The function of several system is adversely
affected by an incorrect wheel/tyre combina-
Tyre damage tion, e.g. ABS or DSC.
Frequently check tyres for damage, foreign To maintain the vehicle's good road behaviour,
matter and wear. always fit tyres of the same make and tread pat-
tern to all wheels.
Indications for tyre damage or other damage to
the vehicle: After a tyre has been damaged, fit the original
wheel/tyre combination.
> Unusual vibration while the car is being
driven Your vehicle manufacturer recommends
to only use wheels and tyres that have
> Unusual driving characteristics like pulling
been approved for your respective car type.
severely to the left or right
Otherwise the tyres could be in contact with the
If there are any indications on tyre dam- body due to, e.g. impermissible tolerances
age, reduce your speed immediately and despite being of an approved size. This could
have wheels and tyres checked to avoid an cause accidents.
increased accident risk. Your vehicle manufacturer is unable to assess
Proceed with caution to the nearest Service or the suitability of wheels and tyres it has not
specialist tyre dealer. approved and cannot therefore guarantee their
Have the vehicle towed there if necessary.< safety.<
Recommended makes of tyre

Age of tyres
Recommendation
We recommend replacing tyres after a maxi-
mum of 6 years regardless of the wear.
Manufacturing date
On the tyre flanks:
DOT ... 5009: tyre was made in the 50th week of
2009. Certain tyre makes are recommended by your
vehicle manufacturer for each tyre size. These
are marked with a star on the tyre flank.
Replacing wheels and tyres When properly used, these tyres meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
Fitting characteristics.
Have the tyres fitted and balanced by
Service only. Retreaded tyres
If such work is performed inexpertly, it could
Your vehicle manufacturer recommends not to
result in consequential damage and thus con-
use retreaded tyres.
stitute a safety risk.<
194
Their carcasses may differ in internal con- Protect tyres against contamination from oil,
Overview
struction or age, therefore restricting their grease and fuel.
durability and having adverse effects on driving Do not exceed the maximum tyre pressure
safety.< stated on the tyre flank.
Winter tyres
We recommend winter tyres for operation on Run-flat tyres*
winter roads or at temperatures below +76/
Controls
457. Designation
Although all-season tyres with an M+S marking
have better winter characteristics than summer
tyres, they do not normally match the perform-
ance of winter tyres.
Driving hints
Maximum speed with winter tyres
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tyres, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the tyres fitted
must be displayed in your field of view. Special-
RSC designation on the tyre flank.
ist tyre dealers and Service can supply these
Navigation
labels. The wheels comprise a conditionally self-sup-
porting tyre and special rim.
Always comply with the speed limit of the
winter tyres to avoid tyre damage and The reinforcement on the tyre flank ensures
resulting accidents.< that the tyre can be used, subject to certain cir-
cumstances, even if depressurised.
Entertainment
Run-flat tyres* For information on continuing to drive with a
When fitting new tyres or changing over from damaged tyre, see Indication of a flat tyre,
summer to winter tyres or vice versa, fit run-flat page 81.
tyres for your own safety. In the event of a flat,
no spare wheel is available. You Service will be Replacing run-flat tyres
glad to inform you on this topic. For your own safety, only use run-flat tyres. In
Communication
the event of a flat, no spare wheel is available.
Swapping wheels between the axles You Service will be glad to inform you on this
Your vehicle manufacturer does not recom- topic.
mend replacing the front wheels with the back
wheels or vice versa, even if the tyres are of the
same size. Snow chains*
This could have an adverse effect on driving
characteristics. Fine-link snow chains
With mixed tyre sizes, swapping over between Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested, classified as safe for use and recom-
Mobility
the axles is not permitted.

mended by your vehicle manufacturer.
Tyre storage Your Service is able to provide details.
Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and prefer-
ably dark place.
Reference
195
Use
Wheels and tyres
Fit snow chains in pairs and only on the rear

wheels.
Please observe the information of the snow
chain manufacturer.
Please ensure that snow chains are always
under sufficient tension. Retension according
to the manufacturer's instructions, if required.
Do not initialise the Run Flat Indicator to avoid
incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, see
page 78.
Maximum speed with snow chains

Do not exceed a speed of 50 km/h or approx.
30 mph.
196
Engine compartment
Overview
Important accessories in the engine compartment
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
1 Jump-starting, negative terminal 5 Engine oil filler cap, see Adding engine oil
Entertainment
2 Vehicle Identification Number 6 Dipstick* for engine oil, see oil level check
3 Filler neck for washer fluid for headlight with dipstick
cleaning system and windscreen washer, 7 Diesel engine: coolant expansion tank, see
see page 58 page 201
4 Jump-starting, positive terminal Petrol engine: the expansion tank is on the
opposite side of the vehicle
Communication
Engine compartment lid

Open engine compartment lid In order to avoid damage, make sure that
Do not work on the vehicle unless you the wiper arms are against the wind-
possess the necessary technical knowl- screen before you open the engine compart-
edge. ment. Only open the engine compartment lid
Have work on the vehicle carried out by your when the engine has cooled down, as otherwise
Mobility
Service if you do not possess technical knowl- injuries can occur.<

edge.
If such work is performed inexpertly, it could
result in consequential damage and thus con-
stitute a safety risk.<
Reference
197
1. Pull the lever. Engine oil
Engine compartment
Oil level check with dipstick*

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface with the
engine at operating temperature, i.e. after
driving continuously for at least 10 km or
6.5 miles.
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Remove the dipstick after approx. 5 min-
utes and wipe with a lint-free cloth, paper
2. Lift the engine-compartment lid all the way cloth or similar.
up. 4. Carefully push the dipstick fully into its tube,
3. Press the release lever and open the lid. then pull it out again.
The oil level must be between the two
marks on the dipstick.
Closing the engine compartment lid

The quantity of oil between the two dipstick
marks is approx. 1 litre, approx. 1.8 Imp. pt.
Do not add oil beyond the upper dipstick
mark. Adding too much oil will harm the
engine.<
Electronic oil level check*
Conditions
Close the engine compartment lid from a height > Engine running and at operating tempera-
of approx. 40 cm, approx. 16 in. It must be ture after a drive of at least 10 km or
clearly heard to engage. 6.5 miles.
If you notice during the journey that the > Vehicle is stationary or driving on even
engine compartment lid has not been roads.
properly closed, stop the vehicle at the earliest
possible moment and close it correctly.<
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing
area of the engine compartment lid is
unobstructed.<
198
Display in the instrument cluster Symbol Function
Overview
Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil at the earliest
opportunity, but no more
than 1 litre, approx. 1.7 Imp
pt., see also Adding engine
oil on page 200.
Controls
Oil level too high.
Adding too much oil
will harm the engine.
1. Tap button 1 in the turn indicator lever up or Have the vehicle checked
down repeatedly until the appropriate sym- without delay.<
Driving hints
bol and "OIL" are shown in the display.
The oil level sensor is defec-
2. Press button 2 on the turn indicator lever. tive.
The oil level is checked and the reading dis- Do not add engine oil. You
played. can continue your journey.
Note the newly calculated
Possible displays distance remaining to the
next oil service, see page 66.
Symbol Function
Navigation
Have the system checked as
Oil level OK soon as possible.
Display via iDrive

1. "Vehicle information"
Entertainment
2. "Vehicle status"
Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 min-
utes if the vehicle is at a
standstill on a level surface,
or about 5 minutes while the
vehicle is on the move.
Communication
3. "Engine oil level"

Mobility
Reference
199
Possible messages sage appears on the Control Display, or with
Engine compartment
> "Engine oil level OK" diesel engines when the oil level has fallen to
just above the lower mark on the dipstick, see
> "Measurement not possible at this time."
page 198.
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
Top up the oil level within the next 200 km
This can take about 3 minutes if the vehicle
or 125 miles, otherwise the engine may
is at a standstill on a level surface and the
suffer damage.<
engine is running, and about 5 minutes
while the vehicle is on the move. Keep oils and greases etc. out of the
If the engine oil has been topped up, deter- reach of children and comply with the
mining the oil level can take up to warnings on the containers. Otherwise, these
30 minutes. products may pose health risks.<
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add one

Oil types
litre!"
Add engine oil at the earliest opportunity, Do not use any oil additives, otherwise the
but no more than 1 litre or 1.7 Imp. pt., see engine could be damaged.<
also Adding engine oil below.
If the oil level is indicated as below mini- Approved engine oils
mum, immediately add engine oil, as other- Your Service will inform you about engine oil
wise engine damage can occur. types that have been approved by your vehicle
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this manufacturer.
checked." Engine oil quality is a decisive factor for your
Adding too much oil will harm the engine's service life.
engine. Have the vehicle checked Approved engine oils comply with the following
without delay.< specifications:
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked." Petrol engine
Do not add engine oil. You can continue Preferred: BMW Longlife-01
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis- BMW Longlife-01 FE
tance remaining to the next oil service, see Alternatively: BMW Longlife-04
page 66. Have the system checked as soon BMW Longlife-98
as possible.
Adding engine oil Diesel engine

Preferred: BMW Longlife-04
Oil filler cap
Alternatively: BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-98
Approved oils belong to viscosity grades

SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 and
SAE 5W-30.
Alternative oil grades

If approved oils are not available, amounts of up
to 1 litre, approx. 1.8 Imp. pt. of a different oil
Only add a maximum of 1 litre, approx. with the following specifications may be used:
1.7 Imp. pt., of oil when a corresponding mes- ACEA A3/B4
200
When selecting a ACEA A3/B4 oil, please 5. Fit the cap and turn until it is clearly heard to
Overview
observe that the oil must belong viscosity click into place.
grades SAE 0W-40, SAE 0W-30, SAE 5W-40 6. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as
and SAE 5W-30, otherwise this could result in soon as possible.
malfunctions or engine damage.<
Disposal
When disposing of coolant additives,
Controls
comply with the relevant environmental
Coolant protection laws.<
General
Do not open the cooling system when the
Driving hints
engine is hot, otherwise escaping coolant
may cause scalding.<
Use only suitable additives, otherwise the
engine could suffer damage. Additives
damage your health.<
Coolant consists of water and coolant additives.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
Navigation
able for your vehicle. Your Service is informed
about suitable additives.
Checking coolant level

1. Only open the engine compartment lid if the
Entertainment
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap on the expansion tank slightly
anti-clockwise until it starts to open, then
allow the pressure to escape before open-
ing it fully.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
Communication
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, see also diagram next to the filler
neck.
Mobility
4. If necessary, slowly top up to correct level

but do not overfill.
Reference
201
Routine maintenance work
Routine maintenance work
BMW Maintenance System Ensure that the date has been set cor-
rectly, see page 69, otherwise the correct
function of condition-based service (CBS) can-
not be guaranteed.<
Downtimes
Downtimes with a disconnected battery are not
taken into account.
Have the scope of routine maintenance work
depending on time, e.g. brake fluid and, if appli-
cable, engine oil and micro/active charcoal filter,
The system maintains traffic and operational carried out by your Service.
safety of the vehicle and takes aspects like hav-
ing the vehicle checked in due time. Its purpose
is to optimise maintenance measures with a Service booklet
view to minimising the cost of looking after your
vehicle. Have routine maintenance work and repair work
carried out by Service. Service must confirm
routine maintenance work in the service book-
let. Entries are proof of regular routine mainte-
Condition Based Service CBS nance work.
Sensors and advanced algorithms take account
of the varying conditions in which your vehicle is
used. This helps condition-based service to For customers in Australia/
determine the required routine maintenance New Zealand
work.
For this reason, the system enables the scope Routine maintenance work
of routine maintenance work to be adapted to The service schedule as prescribed in the Serv-
the individual user profile. ice Booklet is valid also for Australian vehicles.
Detailed service requirements can be displayed
on the Control Display, see page 66.
More information on items that need regular
maintenance and on the scope of maintenance
required can be found from page 238 onwards.
Service data in the remote control

Information on the required routine mainte-
nance work is continuously saved on the
remote control. Service reads out this data and
suggests and optimised scope of routine main-
tenance work.
For this reason hand over the remote control
last used to the service assistant.
202
Socket for on-board Your Service can provide you with information
Overview
on this topic.
diagnosis OBD
Controls
Driving hints
There is an OBD socket on the driver's side to
check components that are crucial for the com-
position of exhaust gases.
Emissions
Warning light lights up:
Vehicle produces higher emissions.
You can continue your trip. Have the
Navigation
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Warning light flashes:
Engine malfunction that can damage the cata-
lytic converter. You can continue your trip, but
moderate your speed and exercise due caution.
Entertainment
Have the vehicle checked without delay.
Data memory
Your vehicle saves data about operation, faults
and user settings. This data is saved in the vehi-
cle and partly also in the remote control. The
Communication
information can be read out with suitable
devices, especially at the Service centre. The
information read out in this way is used to sup-
port service processes and repair or for optimis-
ing and developing vehicle functions. If an
Assist contract exists additionally, certain vehi-
cle data can be sent directly from the vehicle to
enable the desired services.
Mobility
Recycling
Your vehicle manufacturer recommends to
return the vehicle to a return point commis-
sioned by BMW Group. Vehicle recycling is
Reference
subject to the respective national regulations.
203
General care
General care
Washing the vehicle > Remove additional attachment parts, e.g.

spoilers or telephone aerial, if they could be
Notes damaged.
If you use steam-jet cleaners or high- Avoid car washes with a guide rail height
pressure cleaners, make sure you main- of more than 10 cm or 3.9 in, otherwise
tain an adequate distance and a maximum tem- this could result in damage to the wheel sus-
perature of 606/1407. pension.<
Insufficient distance, too high pressure or too
high temperatures cause damage or premature Automatic gearbox
damage that can lead to long-term damage. Keep to the following steps to allow the vehicle
Comply with the instructions for the high-pres- to roll:
sure cleaner.< 1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
Do not apply high-pressure cleaners for lock, even if the vehicle is equipped with
an extended period of time. Please main- convenient access.
tain a distance of at least 30 cm or 11.8 in when 2. Move the selector lever to position N.
applying high-pressure washers to sensors and
3. Release the handbrake.
cameras on the outside of the vehicle e.g. Park
Distance Control* or rear-view camera*.< 4. Switch the engine off.
During the winter months in particular, clean the 5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
vehicle more frequently. so that the vehicle can roll.
Very high levels of dirt and road salt can cause
damage to the car. Headlights
> Do not rub them dry or use caustic or abra-
Cleaning in automatic car washes sive cleaning agents.
You can clean your vehicle in an automatic car > Soak dirt, e.g. dead insects with shampoo
wash right from the beginning. and wash down with plenty of water.
Preferably use car washes with soft, textile > Use de-icer spray to remove ice deposits,
brushes to avoid damaging the paint. not a scraper.
Notes After washing the vehicle

Please observe the following: After washing the vehicle, drive it briefly and
apply the brakes to dry them out; this is neces-
> Wheels and tyres must not be damaged by
sary to prevent reduced braking effect and also
transporting devices.
to avoid corrosion of the brake discs.
> Fold in outside mirrors, otherwise they
could be damaged due to the width of the
vehicle.
Vehicle care
> Deactivate the rain sensor*, see page 56, to
avoid unintentional wiping. Care products
> Bring the rear wiper home position, deacti- BMW recommends using BMW cleaning and
vate it and protect from damage. If neces- care products because they have been tested
sary, ask the car wash operator about and approved.
appropriate protection measures.
204
Observe the notes on the pack. Care of special parts
Overview
Open windows or doors when cleaning on
the inside. Alloy wheels
Only use agents meant for vehicle care. During the winter months in particular, apply
Cleaning agents can contain hazardous sub- wheel cleaning agent. Do not use aggressive,
stances or constitute a health risk.< acidic, strong alkaline or rough cleaning agents
or steam-jet cleaners hotter than 606/1407;
Vehicle paintwork please observe the manufacturer's information.
Controls
Regular care contributes towards driving safety
and retaining the car's value. Chrome-like surfaces*
Environmental influences can have effect on Carefully clean parts such as the radiator grille
the vehicle's paintwork. Adapt the frequency and door handles with plenty of water and
and extent of vehicle care accordingly. shampoo additive, especially whenever the
Driving hints
vehicle is exposed to the effects of road salt.
Leather care
Frequently remove dust with a cloth or a vac- Rubber seals
uum cleaner. Use water and rubber care products.
Dust and dirt from the road chafe the pores and Do not use any silicone-based care products for
folds and lead to a high degree of wear as well treating rubber seals, as these could otherwise
as premature brittleness of the leather surface. be damaged and become a source of noise.
Navigation
Clean bright leather more frequently as dirt
tends to be more visible. Fine wood parts*
To avoid colouring, e.g. from clothes, treat Clean fine wood trim and wooden parts with a
leather every two months. wet cloth only. Subsequently rub dry with a soft
cloth.
Entertainment
Use leather care products because otherwise
dirt and grease will attack the leather's protec-
Plastic parts
tive layer.
These include:
Suitable care products are available from your
Service. > Imitation leather surfaces
> Roof lining
Upholstery material/Alcantara fabric/
Communication
> Light covers
fabric trims
> Glass cover of instrument cluster
Apply vacuum cleaner regularly.
> Moulded parts in matt black
In the event of heavy soiling, e.g. stains from
Use a microfibre cloth for cleaning.
drinks, use a soft sponge or a microfibre cloth
with suitable interior cleaning agents. Clean with water and possibly a plastic cleaning
agent.
Clean upholstery materials over a large area up
to the seams. Avoid strong rubbing. Do not soak the roof lining.
Open Velcro fasteners on trousers or Do not use cleaning agents that contain
Mobility
other items of clothing can damage seat alcohol or solvent, e.g. thinner, detergent,
covers. Make sure that any Velcro fasteners on fuel or similar, otherwise surfaces may be dam-
your clothing are closed.< aged.<
Reference
205
Seat belts
General care
Dirt on the seat belts can interfere with the

action of the reel and represent a safety hazard.
Do not dry-clean or use chemical prod-
ucts, otherwise the fabric may be weak-
ened.<
Clean only when fitted and with mild alkaline
soap solutions.
Only retract seatbelts when dry.
Carpets and car mats*

You can remove the car mats to clean the inte-
rior.
Secure against slipping when refitting the car
mats.
In case of heavy soiling, clean the carpets with a
microfibre cloth and water or fabric cleaning
agent. For this purpose rub to the front and
back in the direction of travel to avoid felting.
Sensors/cameras
Keep sensors and cameras on the outside of
the vehicle, e.g. Park Distance Control*, clean
and free off ice to ensure full functionality.
Displays/screens
Use a microfibre cloth to e.g. clean the Control
Display*.
Do not use chemical or household clean-
ing agents.
Keep all substances and moisture from the
device.
There is otherwise a risk of surfaces or electrical
components being attacked or damaged.
Avoid excess pressure and the use of scratch-
ing materials during cleaning to avoid dam-
age.<
Laying up out of use

Please obtain information from your Service if
you wish to place your vehicle in storage for
longer than three months.
206
Replacing parts
Overview
Toolkit Rear
Controls
Driving hints
1. Fold the wiper arm upwards and hold it.
The on-board toolkit is located in the luggage
2. Press the retaining spring, arrows 1, and
compartment under the floor panel and the
fold the wiper blade upwards, arrow 2.
storage compartment.
3. Remove the wiper blade by pulling to the
front away from the holder.
Replacing wiper blades
Navigation
Front Replacing lights and bulbs
General
Lights and bulbs are important elements in
Entertainment
terms of your driving safety.
Your vehicle manufacturer recommends that
any bulb-related routines that you are not famil-
iar with or that are not described here be
entrusted to BMW Service.
A box containing spare bulbs is available from
1. To replace the wipers fold them upwards, BMW Service. Communication
see page 58. Only change bulbs while they are cool to
2. Fold the wiper arm upwards and hold it. the touch. Otherwise, burns could
result.<
3. Press the retaining spring, arrows 1, and
fold the wiper blade upwards, arrow 2. When working on lighting systems,
always begin by switching off the light in
4. Remove the wiper blade by pulling to the
question, as otherwise short circuits could
front away from the holder.
result.
In order to avoid damage, make sure that Observe any instructions supplied by the bulb
Mobility
the wiper arms are against the wind- manufacturer, to avoid the risk of injury or dam-
screen before you open the engine compart- age when changing bulbs.<
ment.<
Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with
the fingers, because even slight amounts
of dirt or grease will then be burned into the bulb
Reference
and reduce its working life.
207
Use a clean tissue, cloth or similar, or hold the
Replacing parts
bulb by its base.<
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs

Controls, displays and other equipment items
inside your vehicle have light-emitting diodes
behind a cover as their light source.
These LEDs resemble conventional lasers and
are classified as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Do not remove the covers or expose the 1 Cover for high-beam headlight
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source 2 Cover for low-beam headlight
for several hours at a time, as this could cause
3 Turn indicator holder
irritation to the retina.<
To remove the covers:
Xenon headlights* > High-beam headlight: fold latch, arrow 4,
A failure of the bulbs is highly unlikely due to and remove cover from guide.
their long service life. Switching them on and off > Low-beam headlight: unscrew and remove
frequently reduces their service life. the cover, arrow 5.
If a bulb fails, you can continue your trip with Take care when installing the covers, as
activated fog lights. Please exercise due cau- otherwise leaks could occur and cause
tion. Please observe country-specific laws. damage to the headlight system.<
Have work on the Xenon light system, Follow the same steps in reverse order to refit
including bulb replacement carried out the covers.
only by Service.
Work that is improperly carried out could other- Access through the wheel well
wise result in a risk of fatal injury due to high Low-beam headlights and turn indicators only:
voltage.<
1. Turn the wheel inwards.
Headlight lenses 2. Open the flap in the wheel well. For this pur-
Condensation might form on the inside of the pose turn the fastener anti-clockwise to the
headlight lenses in cool or damp weather. When stop with e.g. a coin.
the lights are switched on, the condensation
disappears after a short time. There is no need
to replace the headlight lenses.
In the event of more extensive moisture, for
example water droplets in the light, have this
checked at your Service Centre.
Remove headlight cover

The high-beam headlight bulbs can be replaced
from inside the engine compartment; access to
the low-beam headlight bulbs and the turn indi-
cator bulbs is through a flap in each wheel well.
208
Halogen headlights 1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
Overview
control out of the ignition lock.
Low-beam headlights and high-beam 2. Remove the cover for the high-beam head-
headlights light, see page 208.
The H7 bulb is pressurised, so wear gog- 3. Pull out the bulb holder, see arrow.
gles and gloves. There is otherwise a risk
of injury if the bulb is damaged.<
Controls
There are separate headlight covers for low-
beam headlights and high-beam headlights.
H7 bulb, 55 watts
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
Driving hints
2. Low-beam headlight: open the flap in the
wheel well, see Access through the wheel
well on page 208. 4. Pull out the bulb and change it.
3. Remove the appropriate cover, see 5. Insert the bulb holder.
page 208.
6. Reattach the cover.
4. Disconnect the plug from the light.
5. Push the wire bracket to the side out of the Xenon headlights*
Navigation
mounting, arrow 1, and fold it down,
arrow 2. Side lights, parking lights and daytime
driving lights
H8 bulb, 35 watts
Entertainment
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote
2. Remove the cover for the high-beam head-
light, see page 208.
3. Turn the bulb approx. 90°, see arrow, and
pull it out.
6. Remove the bulb. Communication

7. Insert the new bulb.
8. Fold up the wire bracket and lock it.
9. Connect the plug.
11. Low-beam headlight: attach the flap to the
wheel well.
Mobility
Side and parking lights 4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
5 watt bulb, W5W
5. Insert the bulb and turn it until it stops.
Reference
209
Front turn indicators Rear lights
Replacing parts
PY21W bulb, 21 watts The rear lights are divided into two parts. One
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote part is in the tailgate, the other is in the side sec-
control out of the ignition lock. tion.
2. Open the flap in the wheel well, see Access Bulbs P21W, 21 W
through the wheel well on page 208.
Rear lights for Halogen headlights
3. Turn the turn indicator holder 1 to the left

1 Reversing light
and remove.
2 Braking light/parking light/rear lights
4. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,
take out and change it. 3 Flashing turn indicator
5. Insert turn-indicator socket 1 and turn it 4 Rear fog light*
clockwise as far as it will go.
6. Attach the flap to the wheel well.
Rear lights for Xenon headlights*
Lateral turn indicators

5 watt bulb, W5W
1. Press the light back at the front edge with
your finger tip, arrow 1 and take out with a
swivel movement, arrow 2.
1 Reversing light
2 Parking lights/rear lights LED
3 Brake light
4 Flashing turn indicator
5 Rear fog light*
Contact Service if bulb 2 is faulty.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and remove
while simultaneously lifting the safety Lights in the side section
clamp.
All bulbs are integrated into a central bulb
3. Pull out the bulb and replace. holder.
To fit, place the bulb at the back and press in at
the front.
210
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote 3. Slacken the screws of the tailgate trim,
Overview
control out of the ignition lock. arrows.
2. Push the cover to the back and out of the
luggage compartment side panel and
remove.
Controls
4. Unclip the tailgate trim by pulling it down.
Driving hints
5. Push out the handle for manual opening in
the vent of an electrical fault, see page 31,
3. Disengage the bulb holder by pressing the slip it through the opening and remove the
upper tensioning clamps down, arrow 1. trim panel.
On the right side, if necessary first 6. Release and remove bulb holder with clip,
work the button with the fuel-pump see arrows.
symbol forward and out of the holder.<
Navigation
Entertainment
7. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,
4. Press lower tensioning clamps together, take out and change it.
arrows 2, and remove bulb holder. 8. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly
5. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left, clicks into place. Communication
take out and change it. 9. Slip the handle for manual opening through
6. Re-engage the bulb holder so that it audibly the hole in the tailgate trim and push it in.
clicks into place. 10. Reattach tailgate trim.
7. Re-install the cover.
Licence plate light, centre brake light
Rear fog lights in the tailgate and parking/rear light*
1. Switch off the lights and take the remote These lights use LED technology.
Mobility
Contact Service in case of a defect.

2. Remove the warning triangle from the
holder, see page 217.
Repairing a flat tyre
Safety precautions in the event of a punc-
Reference
ture:
211
Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving Sealant and compressor
Replacing parts
traffic, on a firm surface. Switch on the hazard

warning flashers.
Allow the steering wheel lock to engage with
the wheels in the straight-ahead position. Apply
the handbrake and engage first gear or reverse
or selector-lever position P.
All occupants must leave the vehicle and be led
to a point where they are not exposed to risk, for
example behind a crash barrier at the side of the
road.
If necessary, set up a warning triangle* or a 1 Sealant bottle and sticker with speed limit
flashing warning light* at a sufficient distance. 2 Filler hose
Comply with relevant local laws.<
Please note the expiry date on the sealant
In the event of a puncture, the proper procedure bottle.<
depends on your vehicle's equipment:
> BMW Mobility System*, see the following
section
> Run-flat tyres*, see page 195
BMW Mobility System*
Preparation
The Mobility system is located in the luggage
compartment under the floor panel and the
3 Holder for the sealant bottle
storage compartment.
4 Compressor
Use of the Mobility System may be ineffective
for tyre damage measuring more than approx. 5 Plug and cable for the socket on the inside
4 mm, approx. 3/16 in. Please contact the near- of the vehicle, see page 100
est BMW Service, see page 217, if the tyre can- 6 Connecting hose for connecting compres-
not be rendered usable again with the Mobility sor and sealant bottle or compressor and
System. wheel
If an object has penetrated the tyre, it is best to 7 On/off switch
leave it in position. 8 Pressure gauge for displaying tyre pressure
Comply with the instructions for applica- 9 Deflating button for reducing tyre pressure
tion of the Mobility System on the com-
The plug, cable and connecting hose are stored
pressor and sealant bottle.<
in the compressor housing.
Peel the speed limit reminder sticker off the
sealant bottle and affix it to the steering wheel. Using the M Mobility System
To repair a punctured tyre with the Mobility
System, proceed as follows:
> Fill sealing agent.
> Spread sealing agent.
> Correct tyre inflation pressure.
212
Filling with sealant and back to allow the sealing agent to
Overview
Adhere strictly to the specified proce- spread in the tyre.
dure, otherwise sealant could escape 2. Pump up the tyre again with the compres-
under high pressure.< sor.
1. Shake the sealant bottle. If a tyre pressure of 2 bar/29 psi still can-
2. Remove the connecting hose 6 from the not be achieved, the tyre damage is too
compressor housing completely and bolt severe. Contact the nearest Service.<
Controls
onto the connector of the sealing agent bot-
tle. Make sure not to bend the connecting Stowing Mobility System
hose. 1. Unscrew filler hose 2 of the sealant cylinder
3. Insert the sealant bottle into the compres- from the wheel.
sor housing so that it is standing upright. 2. Unscrew connecting hose 6 of the com-
Driving hints
pressor from the sealant cylinder.
3. Connect filler hose 2 of the sealant cylinder
to the free port on the sealant cylinder.
This can prevent sealant residues from
escaping from the cylinder.
4. Pack the empty sealing agent bottle to
avoid soiling of the luggage compartment.
Navigation
5. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Unscrew the dust cap from the valve of the Distributing the sealant
damaged tyre and screw the filler hose 2 of Immediately drive approx. 5 km, approx.
the sealant bottle onto the valve. 3 miles, so that the sealant becomes evenly dis-
Entertainment
5. Make sure that the compressor is switched tributed around the tyre's interior.
off. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h,
6. Insert plug 5 into the socket on the inside of approx. 50 mph.
the vehicle, see page 100. If possible, maintain a speed of at least 20 km/h,
approx. 12 mph.<
7. When the engine is running:
Switch on the compressor and let run for
Communication
Correct tyre inflation pressure
approx. 3 to 8 minutes to fill the sealant and
achieve a tyre pressure of approx. 2.5 bar, 1. Stop in a suitable place after driving for
approx. 36.3 psi. approx. 5 km, approx. 3 miles.
While you are filling the sealant, the 2. Screw the connecting hose 6 from the com-
inflation pressure can briefly rise to pressor directly onto the tyre valve.
approx. 5 bar, approx. 72.5 psi. In this 3. Insert the plug 5 into the socket on the
phase, do not switch the compressor off.< inside of the vehicle.
Do not run the compressor for more 4. Adjust the tyre pressure to 2.5 bar, approx.
than 10 minutes, otherwise the unit 36.3 psi. For this reason turn the engine on:
Mobility
will overheat and could sustain damage.< > To increase pressure: switch on the
8. Switch off the compressor. compressor. Switch the compressor off
If a tyre pressure of 2 bar/29 psi is not achieved: briefly to gauge the current tyre pres-
sure.
1. Unscrew the filling hose 2 from the wheel
Reference
and drive approx. 10 m or 32 ft to the front
213
Do not run the compressor for more Theft-proof wheel studs*
Replacing parts
than 10 minutes, otherwise the unit

will overheat and could sustain damage.<
> To reduce pressure: press deflating but-
ton 9.
If the pressure is not maintained, take the
vehicle for another drive, see Distributing
the sealant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4 once.
If a tyre pressure of 2 bar/29 psi still cannot be
achieved, the tyre damage is too severe. Con-
tact the nearest Service.< 1 Wheel stud
2 Adapter, in toolkit
Continuing the trip
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
Removing
speed of 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph, other-
wise there is a risk of accidents.< 1. Push adapter 2 onto the wheel stud.
2. Unscrew the wheel stud 1.
Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator, see
page 81 for further notes. Be sure to remove the adapter after installing
Have the faulty tyre and the sealant bottle of the the wheel stud.
Mobility System replaced as soon as possi-
ble.<
Car battery
Changing a wheel Routine maintenance work
Matching tools for changing wheels are availa- The battery needs no routine maintenance
ble as accessories from your Service. whatsoever, in other words the quantity of acid
it contains will normally last for the full service
life of the battery.
Jack mounting points
Your Service will be glad to answer any queries
on batteries.
Replacing the battery

Only use vehicle battery types that have
been approved by your vehicle manufac-
turer, otherwise you could damage your vehicle
and systems and functions are not, or only
partly, available.<
After battery replacement, have your battery
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
registered in the vehicle by your Service so all
the illustration.
convenient functions are unrestrictedly availa-
ble.
Battery recharging
Recharge the battery only with the engine
switched off using the connections in the
214
engine compartment. Connections, see Jump-
Overview
starting on page 217.
Power failure
Some settings must be reinitialised after a tem-
porary power cut.
Individual settings must be updated again:
Controls
> Time: update, see page 68.
> Date: update, see page 69
Access to the fuse box:
> Radio stations: memorise again, see
page 141. 1. Open glove box.
> Navigation system: wait for the full function- 2. Push the damper forward, arrow 1, to disen-
Driving hints
ality of navigation. gage it from the bottom mount.
> Panorama glass roof: it is possible that you 3. Unlatch the glove box by pressing both
may only be able to lift the roof. Have the latches, arrows 2, and tilt it down.
system initialised by Service. Plastic tweezers are located on the power dis-
> Seat and mirror memory: memorise the tributor.
positions again, see page 40. See the rear of the cover for information on fuse
assignment.
Navigation
> Digital compass: calibrate system, see
page 97. Spare fuses are available from your Service.
> xDrive: system is automatically initialised

while the vehicle is moving. During this
period, indicator lights are shown. If the
Entertainment
lights do not go out during the current trip,
have the system checked.
Dispose of old battery

Have old batteries disposed of by Service
or return to a collection point.
Batteries filled with acid should be transported
and stored upright. Secure against falling over Communication
during transport.<
Fuses
Do not repair blown fuses or replace them
with fuses of different colours or ampere
ratings, otherwise overloaded electrical wires
can cause a fire in the vehicle.<
Mobility
Reference
215
Breakdown assistance
Hazard warning flashers Initiating an emergency call
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open it.

The button for the hazard warning lights is
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
located in the centre console.
button lights up.
> LED lights up: connection is being estab-
Emergency call* lished.
> LED flashes, if a connection to the emer-
Conditions gency call number has been established.
> Equipped with Business mobile phone pro- If a Cancellation request is displayed on the
vision. Control Display, the emergency call can be
Emergency call also possible if no mobile cancelled within 5 seconds.
phone is logged-on to the vehicle. In the case of a BMW Assist emergency
> BMW Assist is activated, see page 182. call, the data required to decide on the res-
cue measures to be taken are transferred to
> Radio ready state is switched on.
the emergency call centre, e.g. the current
> Emergency call system is operative. position of your vehicle if this can be deter-
It is a punishable offence to misuse the emer- mined.
gency call system. > If the situation permits, wait in the vehicle
Even if a BMW Assist emergency call is not sup- until voice contact has been established.
ported, it is still possible to initiate an emer- > If the LED is flashing but the emergency call
gency call within most GSM networks using the centre cannot be heard over the hands-free
button. These emergency call numbers and the system, it is possible that the hands-free
terms and conditions of use can deviate from system is malfunctioning. The emergency
country to country. call centre may still be able to hear you,
however.
Participation agreement > Cancellation request: emergency call may
> If the BMW Assist participation agreement be terminated within 5 seconds.
expires, the BMW Assist system can be
> If certain requirements are met, an emer-
deactivated by Service without visiting a
gency call is automatically initiated after a
workshop.
serious accident. The automatic emer-
> The BMW Assist system can be re-enabled gency call will not be hindered by pressing
under certain circumstances after conclu- the button.
sion of a new contract at BMW Service.
216
For technical reasons, the emergency call Warning triangle*
Overview
function cannot be ensured in certain
unfavourable conditions.<
Mobile Service
In many countries Mobile Service is available by
Controls
phone twenty-four hours a day, seven days a
week. This service can render assistance in the
event of a breakdown.
The Contact brochure contains a list of the
numbers to call for Mobile Service. On the inside of the tailgate. To remove, press
on the tab, arrow.
Driving hints
Breakdown assistance using BMW
Assist
A direct connection to Mobile Service can be
Jump-starting
established using the Assist information serv-
Notes
ice, see page 181. This enables you to call
breakdown assistance, see page 182. If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
started with the battery of another vehicle using
Navigation
two jump start leads. Use only leads with fully
insulated terminal clamps.
First-aid pouch*
Do not depart from the procedure described
below, otherwise personal injury could result or
one or both vehicles be damaged.
Entertainment
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur.<
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
Communication
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volt and approx-
The first-aid pouch is located on the right-hand imately the same capacitance in Amp/h.
side of the luggage area in a storage compart- Details are stated on the battery.
ment. 2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle.
The durability of some items is limited. 3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
Regularly check the use-by date and, if neces- The bodies of the two vehicles must not
sary, replace in due time. make contact, otherwise there is the risk
of a short-circuit.<
Mobility
Reference
217
Jump starting connections
5. Connect the second terminal clamp on the

Connect the jump leads in the correct negative jump lead to the negative battery
order to avoid sparks that could cause terminal or an earth connection on the
injury.< engine or body of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine

Do not use any spray products sold as starting
aids.
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and let
in run for a few minutes with increased
idling speed.
The diesel engine must warm up for approx.
10 minutes.
The so-called jump start connection in the 2. Start the engine of the other vehicle as
engine compartment serves as positive battery usual.
terminal. Pull the cover off in an upward direc- If an initial attempt to start the engine fails,
tion. wait several minutes until the flat battery
has been recharged to a slightly greater
degree.
3. Let both engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite
order from that in which they were originally
attached.
If necessary, check the battery and have it
recharged.
The vehicle body earthing or a special nut

serves as negative terminal. Tow-starting, towing away
Connect leads Using the towing eye

1. Remove the cap of the BMW jump start The screw-in towing eye must always be car-
connection. ried in the vehicle. It can be screwed in at the
front or rear of the BMW.
2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive
jump lead to the positive battery terminal or It is located in the on-board toolkit in the stor-
a jump-starting connection on the donor age compartment underneath the floor panel,
vehicle. see page 207.
3. Connect a second terminal clamp on the Use only the towing eye supplied with the
positive terminal of the battery or on the vehicle, and make sure that it is screwed
corresponding jump starting connection of in fully and is tight.
the receiving vehicle. Only use the towing eye for towing on roads.
Avoid lateral loads on the towing eye, e.g. do
4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative not raise the vehicle at the towing eye.
jump lead to the negative battery terminal or Otherwise, the towing eye and the vehicle could
the engine or body earth connection on the be damaged.<
donor vehicle.
218
Screw thread lights, turn indicators and windscreen wip-
Overview
ers would not be available.
> Do not tow the vehicle by lifting the rear
axle, otherwise the steering may be turned.
> Servo assistance is not available when the
engine is not running. The steering and
brakes will require extra effort to operate.
Controls
> Switch on the hazard warning light accord-
ing to national regulations.
Press on the lower section of the cover. The Towing methods

cover is pressed out at the upper edge and can Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye
Driving hints
be pulled out. or by body or suspension components,
otherwise it could be damaged.<
Towing away
Towbar
Please observe before towing The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on
The towing vehicle must not be lighter the same side.
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may
If it is impossible to avoid attaching the towbar
be impossible to maintain control.<
Navigation
at an angle, note the following:
Attach the towbar or towrope to the tow-
> Towbar clearance may be restricted when
ing eyes only. Attaching these to other
cornering.
parts of the vehicle may result in damage.<
> The towbar will generate lateral forces if it is
If the vehicle's electrical system fails, do
attached offset.
Entertainment
not attempt a tow, otherwise you will not
be able to release the electrical steering wheel
Towrope
lock and steer the vehicle.<
Ensure that the towrope is taut when the towing
Manual gearbox vehicle moves off.
Gearshift lever in idle position. For towing, use nylon ropes or tapes, as these
will help avoid sudden tensile loads.
Automatic gearbox Only attach the towrope to the towing Communication
Selector lever in position N eye. Attaching the towbar to other parts
Changing selector lever positions, see page 54. of the vehicle can result in damage.<
Do not exceed a towing speed of
70 km/h or 40 mph and a towing distance
of 150 km or 90 miles, otherwise the automatic
gearbox could be damaged.<
Please observe when towing

Mobility
Please observe the information on towing

to avoid damage to the vehicle or acci-
dents.<
> Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
as otherwise low-beam headlights, rear
Reference
219
Breakdown trucks Manual gearbox
1. Switch on the hazard warning flashers,

complying with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, see page 50.
3. Engage 3rd gear.
4. Keep the clutch depressed while perform-
ing a tow-start, then gradually release the
clutch. Press the clutch down fully again as
soon as the engine has started.
5. Halt in a suitable place, remove the towbar
Have your vehicle transported by a tow truck
or towrope and switch off the hazard warn-
with a hoisting frame, or hoisted onto a loading
ing flashers.
platform.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye
or by body or suspension components,
Automatic gearbox
It is not possible to tow-start the engine.
Tow trucks: xDrive* Have the cause for the engine-starting prob-
lems remedied.
Do not tow your vehicle with xDrive with

just the front or rear axle raised; otherwise
the wheels can lock up and the transfer box can
be damaged.<
Do not raise the vehicle at the towing eye
or by body or suspension components,
Tow-starting
Please observe before tow-start

If the vehicle's electrical system fails, do
not attempt a tow-start, otherwise you
will not be able to release the electrical steering
wheel lock and steer the vehicle.<
Vehicles with xDrive*: do not activate the Hill
Descent Control HDC, see page 79.
If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle. Please
attempt to jump start the engine, see page 217.
220
221
Reference
This section contains technical data, the short
commands for the voice control system, and
the index, which is your quickest way of finding
the information you want.

Technical data
Technical data
Dimensions
All sizes in mm. Smallest turning circle dia.: 11.3 m, ; 37 ft; with xDrive: 11.8 m, 38.7 ft.
Height with roof-mounted aerial*: 1573 mm, approx. 62 in
224
Weights
Overview
X1 sDrive18i X1 xDrive25i X1 xDrive28i
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg (165 lb) load, tank 90Ξ full, without optional extras
> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 1505 (3318) – –
> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 1530 (3373) 1675 (3692) 1685 (3715)
Controls
Permitted gross weight
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 915 (2017) 1030 (2271) 1030 (2271)
Driving hints
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1135 (2502) 1180 (2601) 1180 (2601)
Roof load kg (lb) 75 75 75
(165) (165) (165)
Luggage area capacity litres 420-1350 420-1350 420-1350
(cu ft) (14.8 - 47.7) (14.8 - 47.7) (14.8 - 47.7)
Navigation
X1 sDrive18d X1 xDrive18d X1 sDrive20d
> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 1545 (3406) 1615 (3560) 1565 (3450)
Entertainment
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 940 (2072) 1010 (2227) 940 (2072)
Roof load kg (lb) 75 75 75
(165) (165) (165) Communication
Luggage area capacity litres 420-1350 420-1350 420-1350
(cu ft) (14.8 - 47.7) (14.8 - 47.7) (14.8 - 47.7)
Mobility
Reference
225
Technical data
X1 xDrive20d X1 xDrive23d
> Manual gearbox kg (lb) 1650 (3638) –
> Automatic gearbox kg (lb) 1660 (3660) 1670 (3682)
Front axle load limit kg (lb) 1010 (2227) 1015 (2238)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1165 (2568) 1160 (2557)
Roof load kg (lb) 75 75
(165) (165)
Luggage area capacity litres 420-1350 420-1350
(cu ft) (14.8 - 47.7) (14.8 - 47.7)
226
Towing a trailer
Overview
X1 sDrive18i X1 xDrive25i X1 xDrive28i
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain
countries. Your Service has more information about possible heights.
unbraked kg (lb) 750 (1653) 750 (1653) 750 (1653)
braked on gradients up to 12Ξ kg 1700 2000/1800 2000/1800
Controls
(lb) (3748) (4409/3968) (4409/3968)
braked on gradients up to 8Ξ kg 1700 2000/1800 2000/1800
(lb) (3748) (4409/3968) (4409/3968)
Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 80 (176) 80 (176) 80 (176)
Driving hints
Values after the / are for vehicles with the 'vari-
Navigation
ant for hot countries' optional extra
X1 sDrive18d X1 xDrive18d X1 sDrive20d

Entertainment
unbraked kg (lb) 750 (1653) 750 (1653) 750 (1653)
braked on gradients up to 12Ξ kg (lb) 1800 (3968) 1800 (3968) 1800 (3968)
braked on gradients up to 8Ξ kg (lb) 1800 (3968) 1800 (3968) 1800 (3968)
Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 80 (176) 80 (176) 80 (176)
Communication
Mobility
Reference
227
Technical data
X1 xDrive20d X1 xDrive23d
unbraked kg (lb) 750 (1653) 750 (1653)
braked on gradients up to 12Ξ kg (lb) 2000 (4409) 2000 (4409)
braked on gradients up to 8Ξ kg (lb) 2000 (4409) 2000 (4409)
Trailer nose weight kg (lb) 80 (176) 80 (176)
Rear axle load limit kg (lb) 1280 (2822) 1275 (2811)
Filling capacities
Litres Note
(cu ft)
Fuel tank Fuel grade: page 192
> Petrol engine approx. 63
(13.9 gal)
> Diesel engine approx. 61
(13.4 gal)
including a reserve of
> Petrol engine approx. 8
(1.8 gal)
> Diesel engine approx. 6.5
(1.4 gal)
Window washer system Further details: page 58
including headlight washers approx. 6
(10.6 pt)
228
For Australia/New Zealand
Overview
Engine data
The rated power is determined with fuel quality
RON 98.
Controls
X1 sDrive18i X1 xDrive25i
Displacement cc 1995 2996
Number of cylinders 4 6
Max. power output kW 110 160
Driving hints
at engine speed rpm 6400 6100
Max. torque Nm 200 280
at engine speed rpm 3600 2500
X1 sDrive20d X1 xDrive20d X1 xDrive23d
Navigation
Displacement cc 1995 1995 1995
Number of cylinders 4 4 4
Max. power output kW 130 130 150
at engine speed rpm 4000 4000 4400
Max. torque Nm 350 350 400
Entertainment
at engine speed rpm 1750-3000 1750-3000 2000-2250
Communication
Mobility
Reference
229
Performance data
For Australia/New Zealand
The nominal values for performance data are

determined with fuel quality RON 98.
Top speed
> Manual gearbox km/h 202 –
> Automatic km/h 200 205
> with high-speed km/h – 223
setup*
Acceleration
from 0 to 100 km/h
> Manual gearbox s 9.7 –
> Automatic s 10.4 7.9
Standing start kilometre
> Manual gearbox s 31.0 –
> Automatic s 31.9 28.6

Top speed
> Manual gearbox km/h 205 205 –
> Automatic km/h 205 205 205
> with high-speed km/h 218 213 223
setup*
Acceleration
from 0 to 100 km/h
> Manual gearbox s 8.1 8.4 –
> Automatic s 8.3 8.6 7.3
Standing start kilometre
> Manual gearbox s 28.8 29.5 –
> Automatic s 29.3 29.7 28.2
230
Fuel consumption, carbon dioxide/Θ emissions
Overview
Urban
> Manual gearbox litres/100 km 11.3 –
> Automatic litres/100 km 11.5 12.9
Controls
Extra-urban
Combined
Driving hints
Ο emissions
> Manual gearbox grams/km 191 –
> Automatic grams/km 195 217
Navigation
Urban
> Manual gearbox litres/100 km 6.4 7.0 –
> Automatic litres/100 km 7.1 7.7 7.8
Entertainment
Extra-urban
> Automatic litres/100 km 5.2 5.4 5.5
Combined
> Automatic litres/100 km 5.9 6.2 6.3 Communication
Ο emissions
> Manual gearbox grams/km 139 153 –
> Automatic grams/km 155 164 167
Mobility
Reference
231
Short commands for the voice control
Short commands for the voice control system
system*
Short commands enable you to perform certain item is selected. Here you will find important
functions directly, irrespective of which menu short commands for the voice control system.
Practical short commands

Function Command
Calling up music collection {Music collection}

Calling up tone {Tone}
Calling up settings {Settings}
Calling up on-board computer {On board computer}
Calling up contacts* {Contacts}
Displaying phone book* {Phonebook}
Calling up services* {Services}
Calling up BMW Services* {B M W Services}
Calling up home address* {Home address}
Calling up destination input* {Destination input}
Calling up route guidance* {Guidance}
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD player
Function Command
Playback CD {C D on}
Selecting CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D … track …} e.g. CD 3, track 5
Selecting a track {C D track …} e.g. track 5
Calling up the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD* {C D}
Displaying entertainment details in split screen* {Entertainment details}
232
Music collection
Overview
Function Command
Calling up current playback {Current playback}

Calling up music collection {Music collection}
Playback music collection {Music collection on}
Finding music, calling up menu {Music search}
Controls
Playing most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}
External devices
Function Command
Driving hints
Calling up external devices {External devices}
TV
Function Command
Calling up TV {T V}
Tone
Navigation
Function Command
Calling up tone {Tone}
Entertainment
Radio
FM
Function Command
Calling up radio {Radio}
Communication
Calling up FM stations {F M}
Calling up manual search {Manual search}
Calling up a frequency {Frequency … megahertz} e.g. 93.5 Mega-
hertz or frequency 93.5
Selecting a frequency range {Select frequency}
Calling up a station {Select station} e.g. Bayern 3
AM
Mobility
Function Command
Calling up AM stations {A M}
Calling up manual search {Manual search}
Calling up a frequency {Frequency … kilohertz} e.g. frequency
Reference
753 Kilohertz or 753 Kilohertz
233
DAB
Function Command
Calling up digital radio {D A B}

Switching on digital radio {D A B on}
Memorised stations
Function Command
Calling up saved stations {Saved stations}

Choosing a stored station {Select saved station}
Selecting a stored station {Saved station …} e.g. memorised station 2
Phone
Function Command
Calling up the 'Telephone' menu {Telephone}

Displaying phone book {Phonebook}
Redialling {Redial}
Displaying incoming calls {Received calls}
Dialling a phone number {Dial number}
Displaying list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}
Navigation
General
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}

Calling up destination input {Destination input}
Entering an address {Destination input}
Calling up route guidance {Guidance}
Starting route guidance {Start guidance}
Exiting route guidance {Stop guidance}
Calling up home address {Home address}
Calling up route criteria {Route criteria}
Calling up course of a route {Route profile}
Switching on voice messages {Switch on spoken instructions}
Repeating spoken instruction {Repeat spoken instructions}
234
Function Command
Overview
Switching off voice messages {Switch off spoken instructions}
Displaying address book {Address book}
Displaying last destinations {Last destinations}
Calling up traffic information {Traffic information}
Points of interest {Points of interest}
Controls
Map
Function Command
Displaying map {Map}
Driving hints
Map pointing towards north {Map north oriented}
Map pointing in direction of travel {Map indicating direction of travel}
Map in perspective {Map perspective}
Automatic map scaling* {Map automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
Split screen* settings
Navigation
Function Command
Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}

Switching off split screen {Switch off splitscreen}
Entertainment
Adapting split screen {Split screen display}
Split screen, current position {Splitscreen current position}
Split screen, map pointing towards north {Splitscreen map north oriented}
Split screen, pointing in direction of travel {Splitscreen map direction of travel oriented}
Split screen, perspective {Splitscreen perspective}
Communication
Split screen, cross enlargement {Splitscreen 3 D exit roads}
Split screen scale ... metres* {Splitscreen scale … metres}
e.g. split screen scale 100 metres
Split screen scale ... kilometres* {Splitscreen scale … kilometres} e.g. split
screen scale 5 kilometres
Split screen, highlight traffic information {Split screen, Traffic situation}
Split screen, on-board computer {Splitscreen on board computer}
Split screen, journey computer {Splitscreen Journey computer}
Mobility
Scaling split screen automatically {Splitscreen automatic scaling}

Reference
235
Route guidance with intermediate destination
Function Command
New destination entry {Destination input}

Trip list {Saved journeys}
Contacts
Function Command
Calling up contacts {Contacts}

My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
BMW Services
Function Command
Calling up BMW Services* {B M W Services}

Calling up BMW Online* {B M W Online}
Calling up the Internet* {Internet}
Vehicle info
Function Command
Calling up on-board computer {On board computer}

Calling up the journey computer {Journey computer}
Calling up vehicle info {Vehicle information}
Calling up the vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Settings
Vehicle
Function Command
Calling up the main menu {Main menu}

Calling up settings {Settings}
Calling up options {Options}
Control Display settings {Control display}
Calling up time and date {Clock and Date}
Calling up language and units {Language and units}
236
Function Command
Overview
Calling up limit speed {Speed}
Calling up lights {Lights}
Calling up door locking {Door locks}
Equipment
Controls
Function Command
Calling up climate {Climate}
Driving hints
Navigation
Entertainment
Communication
Mobility
Reference
237
Maintenance overview
The BMW maintenance system informs you The following overview provides information on
regarding the current service requirements, see which maintenance tasks are carried out at the
page 202. individual service appointments.
Standard schedule
Maintenance work Petrol Diesel
Examine Check Control alerts + +

Examine indicator and warning lamps + +
Engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter + +

Handbrake:
Check function of brake engagement + +
Air conditioning system or automatic air conditioning system:
For a separate charge: replace the microfilter + +
With every 2nd engine oil change:
+
For a separate charge: replace spark plugs
Intake muffler:
+ +
For a separate charge: replace air filter element; with heavier
dust deposit, reduce change interval
For a separate charge: replace the fuel filter, with lower fuel +
grades, shorten the replacement interval
Reset service display in line with workshop guideline + +
238
Front brakes
Overview
Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts + +

Brake discs:
Check surface and thickness. + +
Replace if necessary, for a separate charge
Controls
Rear brakes
Driving hints
Replace brake pads, clean brake shafts + +

Brake discs:
Check surface and thickness. + +
Handbrake:
Navigation
Check condition, brake pad thickness and function. + +
Entertainment
Brake fluid
Replace brake fluid + +

Communication
Vehicle check
Check horn, headlight flasher and hazard warning system + +

Check instrument/indication field lighting and heater blower + +
Check lighting system + +
Seat belts:
Mobility
Check condition of the seat belt strap, function of roller mecha- + +

nism, belt interlock and belt buckle
Check windscreen wiper and washer system + +
Reference
239
Tyres:
Check tread depth, running pattern, external condition and + +
inflation pressure; correct inflation pressure if necessary
Initialising the Run Flat Indicator + +
BMW Mobility System*:
Check the expiry date on the sealant bottle. + +
Replace the sealant bottle if necessary, for a separate charge
Battery with status indicator*:
Check the battery. + +
For a separate charge: recharge if necessary
Check the coolant level and concentration, top up if necessary + +
Windscreen washing unit:
Check fluid level, top up if necessary; if required with addition of + +
anti-freeze for a separate charge
Brake lines and connections:
Check for leak-tightness, damage and correct position + +
Underbody, including all visible parts:
Check for damage, corrosion, leak-tightness, including leak-
tightness of shock absorbers and fitting (rebound - compres- + +
sion)
Steering oil container*:
Check oil level, top up if necessary for a separate charge + +
Steering components:
Check clearance, leak-tightness*, damage and wear + +
Check of road safety, test drive:
> Brakes
> Steering + +
> Shock absorbers
> Gearbox
240
241
From A to Z
From A to Z
Index
A Air conditioning mode Armrest, see Centre
– automatic air-conditioning armrest 98
ABS Anti-lock Brake system 91 Arrival time, see Computer 63
System 78 – ventilation 93 Ashtray 100
Acceleration, see Vehicle Air conditioning system 91 AUC Automatic Air
performance 230 Air distribution Recirculation Control 92
Accessories 6 – automatic 92 Audio 138
Accident, see Making an Air flow rate 92 – controls 138
emergency call 216 Air pressure, see Tyre – switching on/off 138
Activated charcoal filter for pressure 193 – tone settings 138
automatic air-conditioning Air recirculation, see – volume 138
system 94 Recirculated-air mode 92 Audio device, external 98
Activating BMW Air supply Automatic
Assist 182, 187 – automatic air-conditioning – air distribution 92
Activating TeleServices 186 system 91 – air flow control 92
Adaptive brake light, see – ventilation 93 – cruise control 59
Dynamic brake lights 83 Alarm system 31 – driving lights control 86
Adaptive Head Light 87 – avoiding false alarms 32 Automatic air-conditioning
Additives – interior movement system 91
– coolant 201 detector 32 – automatic air distribution 92
– engine oil 200 – switching off alarm 32 Automatic Air Recirculation
Address for navigation – tilt alarm sensor 32 Control AUC 92
entering 119 Album information for Automatic DAB/FM
Adjusting the tone for audio music 158 switchover 146
mode, see Tone Albums for music Automatic-dim mirrors 43
settings 138 collection 157 Automatic gearbox with
Adjusting thigh support 38 Alloy wheels 205 Steptronic 54
Adjusting units of measure on ALL programme 93 – interlock 54
the Control Display 65 All-season tyres, see Winter – overriding selector lever
Aerial for the mobile tyres 195 lock 56
phone 166 All-wheel-drive, see xDrive 79 – shiftlock, see Changing
AHL, see Adaptive Head Ambient air, see Recirculated- selector lever positions 54
Light 87 air mode 92 Automatic high beams and
Airbags 83 Anti-freeze low beams, see High-Beam
– deactivating 85 – coolant 201 Assistant 88
– indicator/warning light 84 – washer fluid 58 Automatic low-beam
– indicator light for front Anti-lock Brake System headlights, see High-Beam
passenger airbags 85 ABS 78 Assistant 88
– reactivating 85 Anti-theft alarm system, see Automatic start/stop
Airbag switch, see Keyswitch Alarm system 31 function 52
for front passenger Approved engine oils 200 Automatic TeleServices
airbags 85 Aquaplaning 110 call 187
242
AUTO program for automatic BMW Mobility System 212 Button for starting the engine,
Overview
air-conditioning system 92 – compressor 212 see Start/stop button 50
AUX-IN port 98, 160 – continuing the trip 214 Buttons on the steering
Available services 187 – correct tyre inflation wheel 11
Average fuel consumption 63 pressure 213
– adjusting units 65 – distributing sealant 213 C
Average speed 63 – filling with sealant 213
Avoiding false alarms 32 – sealant 212 Call
Controls
Avoiding motorways in BMW Services 181 – accepting 169
navigation 129 BMW TeleServices 181, 187 – rejecting 170
Axle load limits, see BMW web page 4 – terminating 170
Weights 225 Bottle holders, see Drinks Call up saved trip 127
holders 99 Camera, see Rear-view
Driving hints
B Brake discs 111 camera 75
– brakes 108 Can holders, see Drinks
Backrest contour, see Lumbar – running in 108 holders 99
support 38 Brake fluid, see Next Service Capacity
Backrests, see Seats 37 indicator 66 – fuel tank, see Filling
Backrest width adjustment 38 Brake lights capacities 228
Bar, see Towing methods 219 – bulb changing 210 – luggage area, see
Bass, tone control 138 – Dynamic brake lights 83 Weights 225
Navigation
Battery 214 Brake pads 108 Car
– disposal 34, 215 – running in 108 – battery 214
– jump-starting 217 Brakes 108 – loads 111
– recharging 214 – ABS 78 – stopping 51
– remote control 26 – BMW Maintenance – weight 225
Entertainment
– temporary power failure 215 System 202 Caravan-towing, see Towing a
Battery change, remote – Dynamic brake lights 83 trailer 113
control for vehicle 34 – handbrake 53 Carbon dioxide, see Ο
Battery for the mobile – Next Service indicator 66 emissions 231
phone 177 – running in 108 Care of paintwork 205
Belts, see Seat belts 41 Brakes, see Safe braking 110 Car jack 214
Belt tensioner, see Seat Brake system Car key, see Integrated key/
belts 41 – BMW Maintenance remote control 26 Communication
Biodiesel, see Diesel System 202 Car phone
engine 192 – disc brakes 111 – installed position, see
Blower, see Air flow control 92 – running in 108 Centre armrest 98
BMW Online 183 Braking assistant 78 Car phone, see
BMW Assist 181 Breakdown recovery 182 Telephone 166
BMW homepage 4 Breakdown Service, see Car radio, see Radio 141
BMW Maintenance Mobile Service 217 Catalytic converter, see Hot
System 202 Bridging, see Jump- exhaust system 110
Mobility
starting 217 CBS Condition Based

Brightness of the Control Service 202
Display 72 CD, audio playback 148
Bulb replacement, see
Replacing lamps and
bulbs 207
Reference
243
CD changer 148, 152 Cleaning the windows 56 Connecting a music player,
From A to Z
– controls 138 – capacity, reservoir 228 see USB audio interface 160
– fast forward, rewind 150 – rear window 58 Connecting an iPod, see AUX-
– filling or emptying the – washer fluid 58 IN port 160
magazine 153 – washer fluid reservoir 58 Connecting an iPod, see USB
– random play 149 – washer jets 58 audio interface 160
– selecting track 148 Cleaning your BMW, see Connecting an MP3 player,
– switching on/off 138 General care 204 see AUX-IN port 160
– tone settings 138 Clearance warning, see Park Connecting an MP3 player,
– volume 138 Distance Control PDC 73 see USB audio interface 160
CD player 148 Clock 61 Connecting vacuum cleaner,
– controls 138 – 12h/24h format 69 see Connecting electrical
– fast forward, rewind 150 – setting time 68 appliances 100
– random play 149 Clutch, running in 108 Consumption, see Average
– selecting track 148 Ο emissions 231 fuel consumption 63
– switching on/off 138 Coat hooks 99 Consumption display
– tone settings 138 Cockpit 10 – average consumption 63
– volume 138 Cold start, see Starting the Consumption figures, see
Central locking engine 51 Fuel consumption 231
– from inside 30 Combined instrument, see Control centre, see iDrive 16
– from outside 27 Instrument cluster 12 Control Display, see iDrive 16
Central locking system 27 Comfort/convenience, see – brightness adjustment 72
– convenient access 33 Around the centre – switching off/on 16
Centre arm rest console 14 Controller, see iDrive 16
– front 98 Compartment for remote Controls and displays 10
– rear 98 control, see Ignition lock 50 Control unit, see iDrive 16
Centre brake light, bulb Compass 96 Convenient access 33
changing 211 Comprehensive information – changing battery 34
Centre console, see Around on the roof lining 15 Convenient operation
the centre console 14 Computer – glass roof 28
Changing a wheel 214 – displays on the Control – windows 28
Changing trips 127 Display 63 Coolant 201
Chassis number, see Engine Computer, see iDrive 16, 63 – checking level 201
compartment 197 Condensation, see Vehicle Coolant temperature 61
Check Control 69 parked 111 Cooling, maximum 92
Child restraint systems 45 Condition Based Service Cooling fluid, see Coolant 201
Child safety 45 CBS 202 Cooling function on/off 93
Child safety catches 49 Configuring settings, see Cooling system, see
Child seat mountings, Personal Profile 26 Coolant 201
ISOFIX 46 Confirmation signals for Copyright 2
Child seats, see Child locking/unlocking vehicle 28 Cornering lights, see Adaptive
safety 45 Congestion Head Light 87
Cigarette lighter, see – displaying traffic Country information using
Lighter 100 information 133 BMW Online 134
Cleaning headlights 57 – see Avoiding sections of Country of destination for
– washer fluid 58 route 130 navigation 119
Cleaning the rear window 58 Connecting a music player, Course of route 130
see AUX-IN port 160 Creating contacts 178
Cross-hairs for navigation 124
244
Cruise control 59 Destination in navigation Door key, see Remote control
Overview
– malfunction 60 – entering 119 with integrated key 26
Cup holders, see Drinks – entering manually 119 Door lock 29
holders 99 – entering via map 124 Doors, manual operation 29
Current fuel consumption 62 – entering via voice Doors, unlocking and locking
Currently playing commands 125 – confirmation signals 28
– external devices 162 – home address 122 – from inside 30
Current playback Destination input using BMW – from outside 28
Controls
– for music collection 157 Assist 123 Downhill gradients 111
Cylinders, see Engine Dialling a phone number 170 Draught-free ventilation 94
data 229 Diesel fuel 192 Drawbar load, see Nose
Diesel particle filter 110 weight 113
D Difficulty starting, see Jump Drinks holders 99
Driving hints
starting 217 Drive-off assistant 80
DAB, station scan 145 Digital clock 61 Driver assistance systems,
Dashboard, see Instrument Digital compass 96 see Driving stability control
cluster 12 Digital radio DAB 145 systems 78
Dashboard lighting, see Dimensions 224 Driving hints 108
Instrument lighting 90 Dipstick, engine oil 198 Driving lights, see Side lights/
Data, technical 229 Direction indicators, see low-beam headlights 86
– consumption 231 Flashing turn indicators 56 Driving lights control,
Navigation
– dimensions 224 Direction instructions, see automatic 86
– engine 229 Voice instructions 131 Driving on poor road
– filling capacities 228 Directory in navigation, see surfaces 115
– performance data 230 Address book 121 Driving on right 111
– weights 225 Displacement, see Engine Driving stability control
Entertainment
Data memory 203 data 229 systems 78
Data transmission 187 Display, see iDrive controls 16 Driving through water 110
Date Display lighting, see Dry air, see Cooling
– date format 69 Instrument lighting 90 function 93
– setting 69 Display points of interest 124 DSC Dynamic Stability
Daytime driving lights 87 Displays, see Instrument Control 78
– bulb changing 209 cluster 12 DTC Dynamic Traction
Deactivating/activating Displays and controls 10 Control 78 Communication
Bluetooth connection 168 Displays on the Control – indicator/warning light 78
Deadlocking, see Locking 28 Display 16 DVD
Deadlocks 27 Disposal – country codes 150
Defrosting windows 93 – battery for remote control 34 – settings 151
Defrost windscreen, see – car battery 215 – video playback 150
Defrosting windows 93 – coolant 201 DVD country codes 150
Deleting a trip 127 Dispose of old battery 215 DVD menu 151
Designation, run-flat Distance remaining, see DVD player, see CD
Mobility
tyres 195 Remaining operating player 148

Destination address range 63 DVD video 150
– entering 119, 125 Distance remaining to service, Dynamic brake lights 83
see Next Service Dynamic route guidance 130
indicator 66 Dynamic Stability Control
Door entry lighting, see DSC 78
Reference
Interior lights 90 – indicator/warning light 78
245
Dynamic Traction Control Engine Environmentally-friendly
From A to Z
DTC 78 – Data 229 driving style, see Current

– indicator/warning light 79 – overheated, see Coolant fuel consumption 62
temperature 61 Equaliser, tone control 139
E – rpm 229 ESP Electronic Stabilisation
– running in 108 Program, see Dynamic
EBV Electronic Brake Force – starting 51 Stability Control DSC 78
Distribution 78 – starting, convenient Exhaust system, see Hot
Eject button, see Buttons on access 33 exhaust system 110
CD/DVD player 138 – stopping 51 Expanding the luggage
Electrical fault Engine compartment 197 area 101
– door lock 29 Engine compartment lid 197 Extended connectivity of the
– driver's door 29 Engine coolant, see music player in the mobile
– fuel filler flap 190 Coolant 201 phone 160
– tailgate 31 Engine oil External audio device 98
Electric seat adjustment 38 – adding 200 External devices, random
Electric steering wheel – additives, see Approved playback 162
lock 50 engine oils 200 Eyes
– with convenient access 33 – alternative oil grades 200 – for lashing loads 112
Electric windows, see – approved engine oils 200 – for tow-starting and towing
Windows 34 – BMW Maintenance away 218
Electronic Brake Force System 202
Distribution EBV 78 – checking level 198 F
Electronic oil level check 198 – dipstick 198
Electronic Stabilisation – filling capacity 228 Failure messages, see Check
Program ESP, see Dynamic – intervals between changes, Control 69
Stability Control DSC 78 see Next Service Failure of an electrical
Emails from BMW Online 173 indicator 66 consumer 215
Emergency call 216 Engine power, see Engine False alarm
Emergency operation data 229 – avoiding false alarms 32
– automatic gearbox, see Engine speed, see Engine – switching off alarm 32
Overriding selector lever data 229 Fasten seat belts, see Seat
lock 56 Engine start, see Starting the belts 41
– door lock, see Manual engine 51 Fastest route in
operation 29 Entering a destination by town navigation 129
– fuel filler flap, manual or city name 119 Fast forward
release 190 Entering a junction for – CD changer 150
Emergency Service, see navigation 120 – CD player 150
Mobile Service 217 Entering an address for Fast rewind
Ending a call 170 navigation 119, 125 – CD changer 150
Energy-saving driving style, Entering a street for – CD player 150
see Current fuel navigation 120 Fault
consumption 62 Entering a town/city for – automatic gearbox with
navigation 119 Steptronic 56
Entering points of interest by – door lock 29
name 123 – fuel filler flap 190
Enter post code for – tailgate 31
navigation 120 – tyres 81
246
Fault messages, see Check Fuel 192 Gearshifts
Overview
Control 69 – additives 192 – automatic gearbox with
Filling capacities 228 – average consumption 63 Steptronic 54
Filter – consumption 231 – manual gearbox 54
– see Microfilter/activated – gauge 62 General care 204
charcoal filter for automatic – grade 192 – alloy wheels 205
air-conditioning system 94 – see Average fuel – care products 204
Filtering traffic consumption 63 – carpets 206
Controls
information 133 – see Fuel grade 192 – chrome parts 205
First-aid pouch 217 – tank capacity, see Filling – displays 206
Fixture for remote control, see capacities 228 – fine wood trims 205
Ignition lock 50 Fuel, adding 190 – headlights 204
Fixture for telephone or Fuel consumption display – high-pressure cleaners 204
Driving hints
mobile phone – current fuel consumption 62 – leather 205
– see Snap-in adapter in Fuel display, see Fuel – paintwork 205
centre armrest storage gauge 62 – plastic parts 205
compartment 98 Fuel filler flap 190 – rubber seals 205
Flashing turn indicators 56 – unlocking in the event of an – seat belts 206
– bulb changing 210 electrical fault 190 – upholstery and fabric
Flashing when locking/ Fuel level 62 trims 205
unlocking 28 Fuel saving driving style, see General driving notes 109
Navigation
Floods, see Driving through Current fuel Glass roof, electric
water 110 consumption 62 – convenient operation 28, 29
Floor panel Fuses 215 – remote control 28
– folding up 104 Glove box 98
– raising 104 G GPS navigation, see
Entertainment
Fog lights 89 Navigation system 118
– indicator light 13, 89 Garage door opener, see Gross weight, see
Folding in mirrors, before Integrated universal remote Weights 225
entering a car wash 43 control 95 Ground lights, see Interior
Folding rear seat backrest 101 Gearbox lights 90
Footbrake, see Safe – automatic gearbox with Guided tours 127
braking 110 Steptronic 54
Footwell lights, see Interior – manual gearbox 54 H Communication
lights 90 – overriding selector lever lock
For your own safety 5 for automatic gearbox with Halogen headlight, bulb
Four-wheel-drive, see Steptronic 56 changing 209
xDrive 79 Gearbox interlock Halogen headlights
Free capacity, music – see Changing selector lever – bulb changing 209
collection 159 positions 54 – driving on left/right 111
Front airbags 83 – see P Park 54 – manual beam throw
Front passenger airbags Gear indicator, automatic adjustment 88
Mobility
– deactivating 85 gearbox with Steptronic 54 Handbrake 53

– reactivating 85 Gearshift lever – indicator light 53
Frost protection – automatic gearbox with Hands-free unit 14
– coolant 201 Steptronic 54 Hazard warning
– washer fluid 58 – manual gearbox 54 flashers 14, 216
Gearshift point display 64 HDC Hill Descent Control 79
Reference
Head-level airbags 83
247
Headlight beam throw I Installation location,
From A to Z
adjustment 88 telephone 98
– automatic, xenon Ice warning, see Outside Instructions from navigation
headlights 88 temperature warning 61 system, see Voice
Headlight courtesy delay Icy roads, see Outside messages 131
feature 87 temperature warning 61 Instrument cluster 12
Headlight flasher 56 iDrive 16 Instrument lighting 90
– indicator light 10, 13 – adjusting brightness 72 Instrument panel, see
Headlights, bulb – changing language 72 Cockpit 10
changing 209 – changing settings 72 Integrated key 26
Head restraints 39 – changing the time 68 Integrated universal remote
– adjusting the height 39 – changing units of measure control 95
– removing 39 and form of expression 65 Interactive map 125
Heating – controls 16 Interior lights 90
– mirrors 43 – menu guidance 17 – remote control 28
– rear window 93 – operating principle 16 Interior movement
– seats 39 – overview 16 detector 32
Heating and ventilation, see – start menu 17 Interlock, see Taking out the
Climate 91 – status information 19 remote control 54
Heavy loads, see Loading 112 Ignition 50 Intermittent wiper
Height, see Dimensions 224 – switched off 51 operation 57
Height adjustment – switched on 50 Internet 184
– seats 37 Ignition key, see Remote Internet site, BMW 4
– steering wheel 43 control with integrated ISOFIX child seat
High-Beam Assistant 88 key 26 mountings 46
High-beam headlights 88 Ignition key position 1, see
– bulb changing 209 Radio ready state 50 J
– headlight flasher 88 Ignition key position 2, see
– indicator light 13 Ignition on 50 Jack
High beams and low beams, Ignition lock 50 – mounting points 214
automatic, see High-Beam Importing trips 127 Jacking points 214
Assistant 88 Imprint 2 Journey computer, see
High pressure cleaning Indicator and warning Displays on the Control
jets 204 lights 13 Display 63
Hill Descent Control HDC 79 Inflation pressures, see Tyre Joystick, see iDrive 16
Hints for driving, see Driving pressure 193 Jump-starting 217
hints 108 Information service 181
Holder for telephone or mobile Initialising K
– phone, see Snap-in – after power failure 215
adapter 177 – compass, see Calibrating 97 Kerb weight, see Weights 225
Holders for drinks 99 – panorama glass roof 36 Key, see Integrated key/
Horn 10, 11 – radio, see Memorising remote control 26
Hot exhaust system 110 stations 141 Keyless Go, see Convenient
Hotline 186 – Run Flat Indicator RPA 81 access 33
Hydraulic braking assistant 78 Input map for destination 124 Keyless locking and
Inside mirror 43 unlocking, see Convenient
– automatic-dim 43 access 33
– compass 96 Key Memory, see Personal
Profile 26
248
Keyswitch for front passenger Load-securing equipment, Maintenance system 202
Overview
airbags 85 see Securing the load 112 Manual gearbox 54
Kick-down 55 Lockable wheel studs, see Manual mode
– automatic gearbox with Theft-proof wheel – selector lever lock,
Steptronic 55 studs 214 automatic gearbox 56
Knock control 192 Locking Manual operation
– adjusting confirmation – door lock 29
L signal 28 – driver's door 29
Controls
– from inside 30 – fuel filler flap 190
Language, changing on the – from outside 28 – luggage compartment lid/
Control Display 72 – without remote control, see tailgate 31
Lap-and-shoulder belt, see Convenient access 33 Manual operation, automatic
Seat belts 41 Longlife oils gearbox with Steptronic 55
Driving hints
Lashings, see Securing the – alternative oil grades 200 Map for navigation
load 112 – approved engine oils 200 – changing scale 132, 133
Last destinations 122 Low-beam headlights 86 – destination input 124
Laying up out of use 206 – automatic 86 Map view 131
Leather care 205 – bulb changing 209 Masking film, see Rule of the
LED light-emitting diodes 208 – headlight beam throw road 111
Length, see Dimensions 224 adjustment 88 Master key, see Remote
Licence plate light, bulb Low fuel level, see Fuel control with integrated
Navigation
changing 211 gauge 62 key 26
Light-emitting diodes Low fuel level warning light 62 Maximum cooling 92
LED 208 Luggage area 101 Maximum speed
Lighter 100 – capacity 225 – with trailer 114
– connecting electrical – convenient access 33 – with winter tyres 195
Entertainment
appliances 100 – folding up the floor Measurements, see
Lighting panel 104 Dimensions 224
– instruments 90 – light, see Interior lights 90 Memorising the seat position,
– replacing lamps and – opening from inside 30 see Seat and mirror
bulbs 207 – opening from outside 31 memory 40
– vehicle, see Lights 86 – partition net 102 Memory, see Seat and mirror
Lights Luggage area net, see memory 40
– automatic driving lights Partition net 102 MENU button 16 Communication
control 86 Luggage compartment Menus, see iDrive 16
– High-Beam Assistant 88 – cover 101 Message from information
– side lights/low-beam Luggage compartment lid, service 173
headlights 86 see Tailgate 30 Messages 172
Light switch 86 Luggage rack Microfilter
Limit, see Speed limit 71 – rear luggage rack 113 – BMW Maintenance
Load 111 – roof rack 112 System 202
Load area, see Luggage Luggage rack, see Roof – for automatic air-
Mobility
area 101 rack 112 conditioning system 94

Loads Lumbar support 38 Microphone
– car 111 – telephone 14
– loading 112 M – voice control 14
– securing 112
– trailer 113 M+S tyres, see Winter
Reference
tyres 195
249
Mirrors 42 N O
From A to Z
– heating 43
– inside mirror 43 Navigation OBD socket, see Socket for
– mirror memory, see Seat and – memorise current on-board diagnosis 203
mirror memory 40 position 121 Octane numbers, see Fuel
– outside mirrors 42 – starting route guidance after grade 192
– parking position function 43 destination input 121 Odometer – distance
Mobile phone – voice input 125 recorder 61
– adjusting volume 169 Navigation announcements, Oil, see Engine oil 198
– connecting, see Logging on see Switching voice Oil consumption 198
a mobile phone 166 messaging on/off 131 Oil level 198
– installed position, see Navigation data 118 On-board computer, see
Centre armrest 98 Navigation system 118 Computer 63
– logging on 166 – address book 121 Opening, see Unlocking 33
– operation via iDrive 169 – adjusting volume 131 Opening and closing
Mobile phone, installed – avoiding sections of a – convenient access 33
position, see Centre route 130 – from the inside 30
armrest 98 – continuing route – from the outside 28
Mobile phone, see guidance 129 – via the door lock 29
Telephone 166 – destination input 119 – via the remote control 28
Mobile Service 217 – dynamic route guidance 130 Opening the engine
Modifications, technical, see – entering a destination compartment lid 197
For your own safety 5 address manually 119 Operating principle, iDrive 16
Monitor, see iDrive – entering a destination via Operation on poor road
controls 16 voice control system 125 surfaces 115
Motorways, see Route – exiting route guidance 129 Orientation menu, see Start
criteria 129 – planning a journey 126 menu 17
Multichannel playback 139 – points of interest 122 Outlets, see Ventilation 93
Multifunctional steering – questions on the Outside air mode, automatic
wheel, see Buttons on system 135 air conditioning system 92
steering wheel 11 – refuelling Outside mirrors 42
Multi-function switch recommendations 130 – adjusting 42
– see Turn indicator/high- – route list 130 – automatic-dim 43
beam headlight/headlight – selecting destination via – automatic heating 43
flasher 56 map 124 – folding in and out 43
– see Wiper system 56 – selecting route criteria 129 – towing a trailer 113
Multimedia screen, see – starting route guidance 129 Outside temperature
iDrive 16 – traffic information 133 display 61
Music, managing 158 – voice messages 131 – changing units of
Music, playing 156 Neck restraints, see Head measure 65
Music collection 155 restraints 39 – in computer 65
– backing up 159 Nets, see Storage Outside temperature
– deleting 159 compartments 99 warning 61
– random playback 158 Next Service indicator 66 Overheated engine, see
– restoring 159 North, direction of, in map Coolant temperature 61
Music memory 155 view 131 Overriding selector lever
Music search 156 Nose weight 113, 227 lock 56
MW waveband 141 Nozzles, see Ventilation 93
My Info 173 Nylon rope, see Towrope 219
250
P Preheating, see Diesel Rapeseed methyl ester
Overview
engine 51 RME 192
Panorama glass roof 35 Prescribed engine oils, see Reading lights 90
– convenient operation 28 Approved engine oils 200 Rear fog lights 89
– initialising 36 Pressure, tyres 193 – bulb changing 211
– opening, closing 36 Pressure monitoring, see Run – indicator light 13
– power failure 36 Flat Indicator 80 Rear light, bulb changing 211
– raising 35 Pressure monitoring, tyres 80 Rear lights 210
Controls
– remote control 28 – Run Flat Indicator 80 – bulb changing 210, 211
– trap protection 36 Programmable buttons on Rear luggage rack 113
Park Distance Control PDC 73 steering wheel 11 Rear seat backrest
Parking aid Protective function, see Trap – adjustable 101
– see Park Distance Control protection – folding 101
Driving hints
PDC 73 – panorama glass roof 36 Rear seats
– see Rear-view camera 75 – windows 35 – adjust backrest
Parking assistant, see Park Puncture inclination 101
Distance Control 73 – Run Flat Indicator 80 – adjusting head restraints 39
Parking brake, see – run-flat tyres 195 – folding 101
Handbrake 53 – folding backrests 101
Parking lights 88 R Rear-view camera 75
– bulb changing 209 – activation 75
Navigation
Parking position function 43 Radio – cleaning 77
Particle filter, see Diesel – controls 138 – deactivation 75
particle filter 110 – DAB 145 – displays in the Control
Partition net 102 – memorising stations 141 Display 77
Parts and accessories 6 – regional programmes 142 – driver assistance
Entertainment
Passenger-side mirror tilt- – selecting waveband 141 functions 75
down 43 – switching on/off 138 Rear-view mirror, see
PDC Park Distance Control 73 – tone settings 138 Mirrors 42
Performance data 230 – traffic reports 143 Rear window heating 93
Personal Profile 26 – volume 138 Rear window wiper 58
Petrol, see Fuel grade 192 Radio-control key, see Rear wiper
Petrol consumption, see Fuel Remote control with – replacing wiper blade 207
consumption 231 integrated key 26 Reception Communication
Phone 166 Radio position, see Radio – quality 142
Phone book 169 ready state 50 – radio stations 142
Placing a call, see Dialling a Radio ready state 50 – traffic reports 143
number 170 – switched off 51 Recirculated-air mode 92
Placing in storage 206 – switched on 50 Recirculation of air, see
Plasters, see First-aid Rain sensor 57 Recirculated-air mode 92
pouch 217 Random play Recycling 203
Points of interest 122 – CD changer 149 Refuelling
Mobility
Pollen – CD player 149 recommendation 130

– see Microfilter/activated Random playback Regional programmes on
charcoal filter for automatic – music collection 158 radio 142
air-conditioning system 94 Random playback, external Releasing
Power, see Engine data 229 devices 162 – engine compartment lid 197
Power failure 215 Range 63
Reference
251
Remote control 26 Route 129 S
From A to Z
– changing battery 34 – altering criteria 129

– convenient access 33 – avoiding sections 130 Safe seated position 37
– faults 29, 34 – changing 129, 130 Safety lock buttons, doors,
– garage door opener 95 – displaying map view 131 see Locking 30
– removing from the ignition – displaying streets and Safety switch for rear
lock 50 towns/cities 130 windows 35
– service data 202 – selecting 129 Safety systems
– tailgate 28 Route guidance 129 – airbags 83
Remove headlight cover 208 – altering route – Anti-lock Brake System
Repairing a flat tyre 211 specifications 129 ABS 78
Replacement fuses, see – avoiding sections of a – brake system 78
Spare fuses 215 route 130 – driving stability control
Replacement remote – continuing 129 systems 78
control 26 – starting 129 – Dynamic Stability Control
Replacing bulbs, see – voice messages 131 DSC 78
Replacing lights and – volume of voice – seat belts 41
bulbs 207 messages 131 Safety tyres, see Run-flat
Replacing lamps and Route instructions, see Route tyres 195
bulbs 207 guidance by voice Saving a trip 127
Replacing lights, see messages 131 Saving energy
Replacing lamps and Route map, see Displaying – automatic start/stop
bulbs 207 map view 131 function 52
Reset, see Resetting tone Route selection 129 – gearshift point display 64
settings 140 Routine maintenance work, – saving fuel 108
Restraint systems see Service Booklet Saving fuel 108
– for children 45 RPA, see Run Flat Indicator 80 Scale change in navigation
– see Seat belts 41 RSC Run-flat System system 132, 133
Returning end-of-life vehicles, Component, see Run-flat Screen, see iDrive controls 16
see Recycling 203 tyres 195 Screw thread for towing
Reverse gear Rule of the road, masking eye 219
– automatic gearbox with film 111 Seat adjustment
Steptronic 54 Run Flat Indicator RPA 80 – electrical 38
– manual gearbox 54 – indicating a flat tyre 81 – manual 37
Reversing lights, bulb – indicator/warning light 81 Seat and mirror memory 40
changing 210 – initialising the system 81 Seat belt height
Revolution counter 61 – snow chains 80 adjustment 42
RME rapeseed methyl – system limits 80 Seat belt reminder, see
ester 192 Run-flat System Component 'Fasten seat belts'
Road map 131 RSC, see Run-flat tyres 195 reminder 42
Roadworthiness test, see Run-flat tyres 195 Seat belts 41
Next Service indicator 66 – flat tyre 81 – 'Fasten seat belts'
RON, see Fuel grade 192 – Run Flat Indicator 81 reminder 42
Roof load 225 – tyre pressure 193 – damage 42
Roof rack 112 – winter tyres 195 – indicator/warning light 42
Rope, see Tow-starting and Running in 108 Seat heating 39
towing away 219 Running in the final drive, see
Rotary/pushbutton control, Engine and final drive 108
see iDrive 16
252
Seats 37 Settings for map view 132 Speed
Overview
– adjusting 37 Setting the inside – when towing a trailer 114
– electrical adjustment 38 temperature – with winter tyres 195
– heating 39 – automatic climate control 91 Speed limit 71
– memorising position, see Shifting gears Speedometer 12
Seat and mirror memory 40 – automatic gearbox with Speed volume 139
– memory, see Seat and mirror Steptronic 55 Split rear seat backrests, see
memory 40 – manual gearbox 54 Expanding the luggage
Controls
– safe seated position 37 Shiftlock, automatic gearbox, area 101
Sections of route, see Changing selector lever Split screen, see Switching
changing 130 positions 54 split screen on and off 19
Securing, vehicle Short commands for the voice Split screen content, see
– from inside 30 control system 232 Select display for split
Driving hints
– from outside 28 Short route in navigation, see screen content 19
Securing the load 112 Selecting a route 129 Sport programme, automatic
Selecting a station Side airbags 83 gearbox with Steptronic 55
– DAB 145 Side lights 86 Spray nozzles, see Cleaning
– radio 141 – bulb changing 209 windscreen and
Selecting detour 134 Side lights, bulb changing 209 headlights 57
Selecting the route 129 Side lights/low-beam Stability control, see Driving
Selection options for headlights 86 stability control systems 78
Navigation
navigation 129 Side windows, see Window Start/stop button 50
Selector lever, automatic lifts 34 – starting the engine 51
gearbox with Steptronic 54 Signal horn, see Horn 10, 11 – switching off the engine 51
Selector lever interlock, see Sliding/tilt sunroof, see Starting on uphill gradients,
Changing selector lever Panorama glass roof 35 see Drive-off assistant 80
Entertainment
positions, shiftlock 54 Slot for remote control 50 Starting with a flat battery, see
Selector lever positions, Smokers' package, see Jump-starting 217
automatic gearbox with Ashtray 100 Start menu 17
Steptronic 54 SMS 173 Stations, see Radio 141
Service, see Mobile Snap-in adapter Station scan, DAB 145
Service 217 – inserting/removing 177 Status at time of printing 5
Service booklet 202 – use 166 Status information on the
Service car, see Mobile Snap-in adapter, see Centre Control Display 19 Communication
Service 217 armrest storage Steam jets 204
Service data in the remote compartment 98 Steering wheel 43
control 202 Snow chains 195 – adjustment 43
Service Interval indicator, see Socket, on-board diagnosis – buttons on steering
Condition Based Service OBD 203 wheel 11
CBS 202 Socket, see Connecting – lock 50
Service partners 187 electrical appliances 100 – lock, see Electric steering
Service status 187 Soot particle filter, see Diesel wheel lock 44
Mobility
Settings particle filter 110 – locking with convenient

– clock, 12h/24h format 69 SOS, see Making an access 33
– DVD 151 emergency call 216 Steptronic, see Automatic
– language 72 Sound gearbox with Steptronic 54
– on the Control Display, – middle setting 140 Stopping
changing 72 Spare fuses 215 – car 51
Reference
Settings and information 65 – engine 51
253
Storage compartments 99 Telephone Towrope 219
From A to Z
Storage compartment under – installed position, see Tow-starting 218, 220

the floor panel 104 Centre armrest 98 TP function 143
Storing a destination in the – voice input 174 Track selection on the CD 148
address book 121 Teleservices call 186 Traction aid, see Dynamic
Storing tyres 195 TeleServices diagnosis 182 Stability Control DSC 78
Stowage, see Storage TeleServices Help 182 Traffic congestion
compartments 99 Temperature – switching on traffic
Stowage nets 99 – automatic air-conditioning reports 143
Summer tyres, see Wheels system 92 Traffic information,
and tyres 193 – changing unit of measure 65 categories 133
Supply reservoir, see Washer – coolant, see Coolant Traffic information for
fluid reservoir 58 temperature 61 navigation 133
Surround 139 Temperature display – during route guidance 134
SVCD 150 – outside temperature 61 Traffic information in
Switches, see Cockpit 10 – outside temperature navigation
Switch for front passenger warning 61 – display in
airbags 85 – setting units of measure 65 map view 133
Switching audio output for Tempomat, see Cruise Traffic reports 143
entertainment systems on/ control 59 – Traffic Programme 143
off 138 Tensioning straps, see – volume 143
Switching off the engine, see Securing the load 112 Trailer pulling, see Towing a
Start/stop button 50 Theft-proof wheel studs 214 trailer 113
Switching on Theft protection Trailer Stability Control 114
– audio 138 – for wheel studs, see Theft- Trailer towing 113
– CD changer 138 proof wheel studs 214 – towing loads and gross
– CD player 138 Third brake light, see Centre weight 227
– radio 138 brake light 211 Transporting children 45
Switching the engine on, see Tilt alarm sensor 32 Transport securing
Start/stop button 50 TMC stations, see Traffic equipment, see Securing
SW waveband 141 information 133 the load 112
Symbols 4 Tone Trap protection
– settings 138 – panorama glass roof 36
T Toolkit 207 – windows 35
Top 50 for music Tread depth, see Minimum
Tailgate 30 collection 157 tread depth 193
– convenient access 33 Top speed Trip distance recorder 61
– emergency operation, see – see Vehicle Triple turn signal 56
Opening manually 31 performance 230 Turn indicators
– opening from inside 30 Torque, see Engine data 229 – indicator/warning light 12
– opening from outside 31 Towbar 219 – triple turn signal 56
– opening manually 31 Towing away 218, 219 Turning circle, see
– remote control 28 – methods 219 Dimensions 224
Tail light, see Rear lights 210 – vehicles with automatic Tyre pressure 113, 193
Tank capacity, see Filling gearbox 219 – loss 81
capacities 228 Towing eye, screw thread 219 Tyre pressure monitoring, see
Technical data 224 Towing eyes 218 Run Flat Indicator 80
Technical modifications, see Towing eyes for tow-starting Tyre puncture, see Run Flat
For your own safety 5 and towing away 218 Indicator 81
254
Tyres Vehicle battery, see Car Wear indicators in the tyres,
Overview
– age 194 battery 214 see Minimum tread
– changing, see Changing a Vehicle care, see General depth 193
wheel 214 care 204 Weights 225
– condition 193 Vehicle recycling, see Welcome lights 86
– damage 194 Recycling 203 Wheelbase, see
– minimum tread depth 193 Ventilation 93 Dimensions 224
– pressure monitoring, see – draught-free 94 Wheels and tyres 193
Controls
Run Flat Indicator 80 Ventilation, see Climate 91 Wheelslip control, see
– pressures 193 VHF waveband 141 Dynamic Stability Control
– punctures 81 Video menu 150 DSC 78
– run-flat 195 Video playback 150 Width, see Dimensions 224
– running in 108 Voice, see Route guidance by Window lifts 34
Driving hints
– storage 195 spoken instructions 131 – safety switch 35
– tread 193 Voice-activated phone Windows 34
– wear indicators, see book 175 – convenient operation 28
Minimum tread depth 193 Voice control – opening, closing 34
– winter tyres 195 – overview 21 – safety switch 35
Tyre tread 193 – short commands 232 – trap protection 35
Voice input Windows, displays on the
U – telephone 174 Control Display 16
Navigation
Voice messages from Windscreen
Units of measure navigation system 131 – cleaning 57
– average fuel – repeating 131 Windscreen wiper blades,
consumption 65 – switching on/off 131 changing 207
– temperature 65 – volume control 131 Winter-grade diesel 192
Entertainment
Universal garage door opener, Volume 138 Winter tyres 195
see Integrated universal – audio sources 138 – speed limit 71
remote control 95 – mobile phone 169 – tyre storage 195
Universal remote control 95 – traffic reports 143 Wiper blades, replacing 207
Unlocking – voice messages 131 Wiper system 56
– from inside 30 Wordmatch principle for
– from outside 28 W navigation 128
– tailgate 33 Work in the engine Communication
– without remote control, see Warning and indicator compartment 197
Convenient access 33 lights 13 Wrench/screwdriver, see
Updating navigation data 118 Warning messages, see Toolkit 207
USB audio interface 160 Check Control 69
Warning triangle 217 X
V Washer fluid 58
– reservoir capacity 59 xDrive 79
VCD 150 Washer fluid reservoir 58 Xenon headlights 88
Mobility
Vehicle Waste tray, see Ashtray 100 – automatic headlight beam

– identification number, see Water on roads, see Driving throw adjustment 88
Engine compartment 197 through water 110 – bulb changing 208
– measurements, see Water penetration 204 – driving on left/right 111
Dimensions 224 Waveband for radio 141
– returning, see Recycling 203
Reference
– running in 108
255
Y
From A to Z
Your individual vehicle 5

– settings, see Personal
Profile 26
256
More about BMW
The Ultimate
www.bmw.com Driving Machine
01 41 2 604 181 En iDrive
*BL260418100C*

X1 E84 Owners Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

X1 E84 Owners Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Contents

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

148 CD/DVD player and CD changer

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

About this Owner's Symbols used

Symbol for components and

Routine maintenance work and repairs Communication

For customers in Australia/New bly trained personnel. If such work is performed

ards, we at BMW pursue a policy of continuous,

BMW recommends using parts and

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1 Safety switch for electric rear windows 35 5 Steering-lever stop, left

Side lights 86 Parking lights* 88

Low-beam headlights 86 Computer 63

Rear fog lights 89

Activating/deactivating voice con-

Next entertainment source

10 Switching the ignition on/off and

11 Steering-lever stop, right Communication

Rear window wiper 58

1 Speedometer 6 Display for

> Indicator and warning lights 69 > High-Beam Assistant* 88

Rear fog lights* 89

Flashing turn indicators 56

Run Flat Indicator RPA 80

You can call up additional information, e.g.

1 Roof lining 15 10 Controller with buttons 16

Central locking system 30

5 Automatic air conditioning system 91

8 Park Distance Control PDC* 73

Hill Descent Control HDC* 79

Deactivating the automatic start/

Dynamic Traction Control DTC 39

9 Gearshift lever for manual transmission 54

The principle Switching off

Control Display 2. Press

White arrows to the left or right indicate that

All the functions of iDrive can be called up via

the main menu.

Selecting a menu item

Press the OPTION button. 1. Press the MENU button.

Other possibility: jog the controller to the right

> Operating options for the selected menu.

4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-

3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.

Select display for split screen content*

information from the on-board computer.

... Press the button.

Displaying the assignment of the Symbol Function

Displaying brief info Input matching for navigation

Displaying detailed information

Letters and digits

Press the controller: deletes

timedia will be read out.

short commands emergency calls. In stress situations, the

Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 181 - © 02/10 BMW AG

Remote control/key In addition, information about service require-

Two remote controls with key.

Buttons on the remote control Press button 1 to release the key.

New remote controls